Interface Signals for SINUMERIK 8 System

System 8 (N/2) I E.4.
84
Contents
0 Interface signals for SINUMERIK 8

arranged according to PC addresses
00 Interface signals for extended VDI interface,

arranged alphabatically
1. Connections
1.1 Installation
-
1.1.1 NC component parts
1.1.1.1 Mounting
1.1.1.2 Cables and plugs
1.1.1.3 Mains requirements
1.1.1.4 Mains connections
1.1.1.5 Switch on sequence

Switch on konditions
1.1.1.6 Earthing
1.1.1.7 Measures to Reduce Interference
1.1.1.8 Mechanical and climatic conditions
1.1.2 NC cubicle
1.1.2.1 Standard cubicle 1500 mm
1.1.2.2 Compact cubicle

a
System 8 (N/2) II E.4.84
2. Description of extended VDI interface

Interface control - SINUMERIK
2.1 General
2.1.1 Reset signals

Summary of effect of reset signals
2.2 Description of inteqral PC (interface control)
2.2.1 PC interface
2.2.2 PC data
2.3 Definition of input and output siqnals
2.3.1 Output signals NC --e PC
2.3.2 Input signals PC 4 NC
2.4 Output siqnals NC +PC

Ready signals to the interface
2.4.1.1 *NC READY 1

2.4.1.2 &NC READY 2
2.4.2 *flOTION COMMAND
2.4.2.1 Automatic and MDI-Auto modes
2.4.2.2 Set Up mode
2.4.3 *PROGRAM ACTIVE
2.4.4 *REFERENCE POINT REACHED
2.4.5 *BUFFER STORE EMPTY
2.4.6 CONTROL ACTIVE
System El (N/2) III E.4.84
2.5 Output signals NC I PC

Oparatinq mode signals to the interface control
2.5.1 Setting up
a) X JOG/HANDWHEEL
b) X INCREMENTAL
c) X RETRACE
d) 5: ZERO RETURN
e) X SET ACTUAL VALUE STORE
2.5.2 1x AUTOM4TIC
2.5.3 X MD1 AUTOMATIC
2.5.4 X SINGLE BLOCK
2.5.5 X MANUAL DATA INPUT
2.5.6 X DATA TRANSFER
2.6 Output siqnals NC ----L PC

Program commands to the interface control
2.6.1 General
2.6.2 Miscellaneous functions M
2.6.3 X PROGRAMMED STOP MOO/M01
2.6.4 X PROGRAM END M02/M30
2.6.5 X SPINDLE SPEED S
2.6.5.1 Automatic and MDI-Auto modes
2.6.5.2 With FEED HOLD
2.6.6 X BLOCK CHANGE DELAY
2.6.7 Tool number T
2.6.8 Auxiliary Function H
2.6.9 Preparatory functions G

2.6.9.1 X THREAD CUTTING G33/G63
2.6.9.2 X RAPID TRAVERSE GO0
System 8 (N/2) IV E.4.84
2.6.10 ACTIVE PROGRAMNUMBER

2.6.11 ACTIVE SUB-ROUTINE NUMBER
Putput Signals for Control of the Spindle (NC -- PC)
2.6.12 Block Diagram of I/O-Signals, Spindle Control

2.6.12.1 Oriented Spindle Stop Ml9 (01) (02)
2.6.12.2 Ramp Characteristic, Main Spindle Drive
2.6.12.3 Additional Spindle Monitoring
2.6.13 ACTUAL SPINDLE ROTATIONCLOCKWISE
2.6.14 SPINDLE SPEED LIMIT

2.6.15 *SPINDLE IN POSITION
2.6.16 *SPINDLE AT SPEED
2.7 Input Signals PC -- NC

Ready Signals to the SINUMERIK
2.7.1 EMERGENCYSTOP
2.7.2 *NC START
2.8 input Signals PC -- NC

Interface Control Access to SINUMERIK
2.8.1 INPUT VIA FIRST OPERATORSPANEL
2.8.2 *NC OPERATIONWITHOUTOPERATOR'S PANEL
2.8.3 *DISPLAY DATA FROM PC
2.8.4 PC Display Parameters
2.8.4.1 1 Byte for PC Dirsplay Coordination
2.8.4.2 1 Byte for Data Module No,
2.8.4.31 1 Byte for Relative Data Start in Data Module
2.8.4.4 1 Byte for Data Start on the Display
2.8.4.5 1 Byte for Data Length
2.8.5 CYCLE INHIBIT
2.8.6 Display of PC - Data in NC InputsBuffer
2.8.6.1 PC-INFORMATION IN INPUT-BUFFER
2.8.6.2 INPUT-BUFFER ERASE
2.8.6.3 PC-ALARM CHECK AFTER INPUT
System 8 (N/2) V E.4.84
2.8.6.4 32 CHARACTERSEXCEEDED
2.8.6.5 40/120 CHARACTERSEXCEEDED
2.8.6.6 WRONGCHARACTERSIN INPUT-BUFFER
2.9 Input Signals PC -- NC

Access to Program Sequence from Interface Control
2.9.1 *DATA INPUT ENABLE

2.9.2 *GENERAL FEED DRIVE ENABLE
2.9.3 *FEED DRIVE ENABLE (axis specific)
2.9.4 *CONTROLLER ENABLE
2.9.5 DECELERATION (for Zero Return)
2.9.6 EXTERNAL DECELERATION
2.9.7 LIMIT SWITCHES
2.9.8 *FOLLOW UP OPERATION
2.9.9 SECONDSOFTWARELIMIT SWITCH - X ACTIVE
2.9.10 *ZERO OFFSET GROUP
2.9.11 *FEEDRATE MULTIPLICATION FACTOR
2.9.12 "FEEDRATE REDUCTION I:100
2.9.13 "4TH AXIS = MAIN AXIS
2.9.14 REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGEDELAY
2.9.15 *CANCEL REMAINING DISTANCE TO GO
2.9.16 *CANCEL REMAINING SUB-ROUTINE REPETITIONS
2.9.17 *AXIS CHANGEOVER
2.9.18 *MIRROR IMAGE
2.9.18.1 8T, Sprint 8T, 8N
2.9.18.2 8M, Sprint 8M, 8MC
2.10 Input Signals to Spindle Controller PC -- NC
2.10.1 *SECOND RAMP VALUE FOR SPINDLE/*KV SWITCHOVER

2.10.2 *SPINDLE OSCILLATE
2.10.3 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMANDCLOCKWISE
2.10.4 SPINDLE STOP
2.10.5 *GEAR CODING
System 8 (N/Z) VI E.4.84
2.11 Data Transfer PC -- NC
2.11.1 2 Bytes for External Data Input

2.11.2 AXIS CODING
2.11.3 Modification Signals for Data Transfer
2.11.3.1 *TOOL OFFSET
2.11.3.2 *SUPPLEMENTARYOFFSET
2.11.3.3 *ADDITIVE ZERO OFFSET
2.11.3.4 *PROGRAMNO.
2.11.3.5 *FEED WORDSI,2
2.11.3.6 *SPINDLE SPEED COMMANDVALUE
2.11.3.7 *R PARAMETERWORDS1,2,3
2.11.3.8 *SYNCHRONOUSAXIS TRAVERSE
2.11.3.9 *REFERENCE POINT NO. 1
2.11.3,10 *INTERFACE ALARM
2.11.4 ?R PARAMETERREAD/STORE (Block Transfer via Handshake)

2.11.4.1 *R PARAMETERREAD
2.11.4.2 *R PARAMETERSTORE
2.12 Inhibit Sianals PC -- NC
2.12.1 AXIS INHIBIT

2.12.2 *AUXILIARY FUNCTION OUTPUT INHIBIT
2.13 Data Transfer DNC.-(02)
2.13.1 INFORMATION STORED IN I-BUFFER

2.13.2 I-BUFFER NOT CLEAR
2.13.3 DATA MODULENO. FOR I-BUFFER
2.13.4 TRANSFER DATA FROM O-BUFFER
2.13.5 O-BUFFER NOT CLEAR
2.13.6 DATA MODULENO, FOR O-BUFFER
2.13.7 DATA TRANSFER IN PROGRESS
2.13.8 DNC ACTIVE
2.13.9 DNC LINK IS INTERRUPTED
System 8 (N/2) VII E.4.84
2.14 Extended Interface NC/PC (02)

2.14.1 PC DATA OUTPUT VIA 2ND V.24 SERIAL INTERFACE
2.14.2 NC-ALARM
2.14.2.1 *READ NC-ALARM
2.14.3 CURRENT PROGRAM-STATUSPOINTER
2.14.4 DI/O-CURSOR RESET
2.14.5 NC/PC-Monitoring
2.14.5.1 PC-MONITORING
2.14.5.2 NC-MONITORING
2.14.6 TOUCH PROBE CONTACT
2.14.7 8T/Sprint 8T SOFTWARE(NC - PC)
2.14.8 8T/Sprint 8T SOFTWARE(PC - NC)
2.14.9 IN-PROCESS GAGING
2.15 Extended Interface NC/PC

2.15.1 NC in RESET STATE
2.15.2 G-Code Output 694 to G97
3 Description of "Mains ON Module" Signals
3.1 EMERGENCYSTOP
3.2 SPINDLE OFF
SPINDLE ON
3.3 FEED HOLD
FEED START
3.4 NC ON
3.5 OPERATORLOCK (keyswitch)
3.6 START
System 8 (N/Z) VIII E.4.84
4. Description of the Signals NC - Machine
4.1 NC READY 2
4.2 Feed drives
4.2.1 SPEED COMMAND
4.2.2 *CONTROLLER DISABLE
4.3 Main Spindle Drive
4.3.1 SPEED COMMAND
4.3.2 *CONTROLLER DISABLE
4.3.3 *PUNCH/NIBBLE "ON" (Glitch Engage)
5. Description of the signals Machine - NC
5.1 Feed drives

5.1.1 VELOCITY CONTROLLER READY
5.1.2 *EMERGENCYSTOP
5.1.3 *NIBBLING BERO
5.1.4 Measuring Probe Input
5.2 Handwheel
5.2.1 AUXILIARY SIGNAL 1
5.2.4 DRF
6. Description of Standard
Operator's Panel Signals
6.1 Block Diagram

6.2 Standard Operator's Panel
6.2.1 Data Source (3 Position Switch)
6.2.2 Axis Selector Switch I,2
6.2.3 Rapid Traverse Override Switch
6.2.4 Feedrate Override Switch
6.2.5 Sindle Speed Override Switch
System 8 (N/Z) IX E.4.84
7. Operator's Panel Extension

(Customising)
7.1 Technical Data

7.2 Accessories
7.3 Overview.
8. External Position Displays
8.1 Technical Data

8.2 Position Data Coding
l 8.3 Accessories
8.4 Overview
8.5 Connecting Position Displays and Logic
modules to the Operator's Panel
9. Peripherals and Accessories SIMATIC S5
9.1 Basic Control 2

9.2 Basic Control 3
9.3 Accessories
9.4 Technical Data and Connection Layout
for the Peripherals
9.5 PC Memory Addressing
~0 9.5.1 Addressing of RAM-Module.
/ 9.5.2 Addressing of EPROM/RAM-Module 356
9.6 Input/Output Module Addressing
9.7 Extension Rack and Connecting Modules
9.8 PC Input/Output Power Supply
9.9 Differences in Interfacing the AG S5-150s
System 8 (N/2) X E.4.84
10. System 8 Diagrams

10.1 Operator's Panel Symbols 8T/Sprint 8T
10.2 Cable and Equipment Overview 8T/Sprint 8T
10.3 Operator's Panel Symbols 8M/Sprint 8M
10.4 Cable and Equipment Overview 8WSprint 8M
10.5 Operator's Panel Symbols 8MC
10.6 Cable and Equipment Overview 8MC
10.7 Operator's Panel Symbols 8N
10.8 Cable and Equipment Overview 8N
10.9 System 8 Accessories
11. Cable Diagrams
12. External Devices and Dimension Drawings

System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
-l-
This manual describes the individual interface signals between

the control and the pC interface control or machine and their
interaction.
The form of the signals complies with VDI 3422 in as far as they
are here described.
This manual contains:

- Information on control installation
- Interface description
PC interface control - SINUMERIK *
- Description of the "Mains ON module"signals
- Description of the NC - machine signals
- Description of the standard operator's panel signals
- Description of extended operator's panel (customised)
- Diagrams ST/ Sprint ST
- Diagrams 8M, Sprint 8M
- Diagrams 8MC
- Cable diagrams
- External equipment and operating elements
- Practical examples, recommendations
We reserve the right to change this manual when required by

technical modifications.
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
-2-
Nomenclature:
This manual applies to:
- Lathe controls (8T/Sprint 8T)

- Boring and milling machine controls (8M, Sprint 8M)
- Boring/milling machines and machining centre controls (SMC)
Where the three types of control differ this is indicated by 8T, EN,
8M or SMC. Cable diagrams for 8-r; Sprint 8T, 8M, Sprint 8F1, 8N, and 8EC are
given in Chapter 11; Diagrams for external equipment and operating
elements are all included in Chapter 12,
Inverse signals, which become active for a logic "O", are indicated
by the symbol ' in front of the signal name. 0-
As an additional aid to identification the operating modes and
procedures also include their associated symbols.
In the pulse diagrams all signals which are described are written
in capital letters. Heavy lines represent actual signals and light
lines symbolic processes.
The signals refer to the NC - PC interface. A seperate interface

manual is available for the relay-interface control,
m... @ indicates the lst, 2nd . . . 10th axis.
(Ol), (02) defines the software edition, from which on the specific
function or signal is available.
System 8 (N/2) o-1 E.4.84
Interface signals for SINUMERIK 8, arranged according to PC addresses

Input signals PC - NC
---l--
Bit number
Rel.addr.
Ident.-
Number
----a-__
----
PC flaq
---
5 4 3 2 1 0
---_
PC address
A0
- Q - -Gl- Al- - D- - -Q - - ET/Sprint

EM/Sprint
8T
EM
EN, 8MC
m---m--
M03.
--a--
t EE03.
-- -- a. - 3d-- - -3- ,q -
- d-- -2 -
.?
_.--2
L--m--m-
A2
TE MO4 . --- t -a -- T -. - --d- T - -LT, - 3
-&- - 2-
@
EM/Sprint EM
-------
t ;EOT. - - -
only
-l--
A3 EN/EMC
t GOT.
-- - --- - - - -da
A
4 - -.I-7 - --7 - -3- . Gl
rA6
-----
N3 -s-e-- Q- - o- -a -Gl- -a - -Q, - - -a-
---- - - 0 @
t- EE07.
-LOS.
-EC---
0 0 0 0 0 a
8MConly
- A7
------
M09. @
-EEoF. - - -.
I--
A8
iGo.- - -- 09
EEOAY ---
*Follow- Axis in- necelera. ITFeed *Con - Limit I-imit

parked
UD onera- hibit tion (for drive 'troller switches - !switches.
axis tion (2.12.1) return to enable enable minus Iplus
(2.9.8) datum) (axis see. (2.9.4) (2.9.7) (2.9.7)
(2.9.5) cific)
(2.9.3)
A
Axes: e.g.: I)T/Sprint 8T x

8M/Sprint 8M/8b'C 1 : x; 3 = z
8
E.g.: t "Axis inhibit 7 " = Flag M08.5

System 8 (N/2) 0 -2 E.4.84
Input signals PC 3 NC
Bit number
Rel.addr.
Ident.- - p, T,;o- - -
7 6 5 4 3 2 I 0
Number - -PC-address
---. I
I
Al0 (2.9.9.)
----me__ 2nd software
Ml2. limit switch-
7mc: - -- - L- ctive .. _ _
Ml3. put enable changeover 16

--Ezo, - - - - - - .. - - 7 - - -
I 1 I I I
---_-__Al2 (2.9.6) (2.10.5) (2.10.') (2.10.2) (2.10.3) 12 '0 4)
External de l Gear coding l Solndle *spindie *
TE Ml4.
I 1 I I
) (2.8.5)
re- Cycle l Zero offset
. L I_L,LI.
l Modlflcatlon slqnals for data transfer

-m--w Al4 - -- Read
i NC- (2.".3.6i ~(2.11.3.5) (Z.li.j;S) (2.11.3.4) (2.11.3.3) (2.11.3.2) (2.11.3.1)
N4 M16. Feed word 2 Feed word I orooram no. additive suool. off- 1001 off-
I alarms
--glib.- _- _.__ _ __ _ m~,smwi _ _ _ _ _ _ .-.-.-.- z?rg QffSSL set. - - - .%L - - - .
Al5 l flodlfIcatlon sisnals for data transfer

---,;;----- (2.11.3.7) (2.11.3.7j (2.11.3.7) R P,Jx- R Para-
meter (2.11.3.10) (2.11.3.9) 2.11.3.8)
R parameter R parameter R oarameter mete+ Interface Oatum point synchronous
StOIe read
- _ ->mdA- _ .wnrd 2- _ watzCL _ _ ser.alncm- aa.-l---.arlr&s~--
--Eli-.- - --a- - --3--
Al6 3' Number of A Paramotcrs PC to NC/PC from NC (max. 63)
mm-- - -- -.
xis coding (2.11.2)
M'E.
-------.-----.- ---- Lj.-E- -+c-~~-L -A_-.
EE12. t
Data module no. (13OW. 15OAl/aba. address 1150s)
Al7 1st byte cxtornal data input l2.11.0
-m----m. for
M19. Ii G __- F * E D C
--------------)-- _-- --- --- -------- 8 A
t
EEl3.
Data module no. 113OW, lS,OAl/abs. address IlSOSl
---v-m- Al.9 2nd byte for external data input (2.11.1)
M20. 0 P 0 L K I
______. ---- ------ i_----em---
EEl4.
4
A19 current PC data DIO- in-process
program transfer ST/
.- - - - - - CUKBOC sprint ST gWlg
HO1 status via 2nd m*et Software
-- - - - - pointer V.24 (DNC)
EEOl
Axes: E.Q.: 8T/Sorint 8T 0=x, @=z

8M/Sprint 8M/8MC 0=x, B=Y, @=z
1) (2.9.13.2) Demand for deceleration

of block modulation (8N only)
2) (2.10.1) * KV switch (only 8N)
3) R-parameter read/store (2-11-1)
NC PC
- - - - monitoring monitorinZI
no0 (NC1021 (NC1021
I---
ES00
Flaq byte MOO can only be displayed via status prosram

System 8 (N/Z)
E.4.84
Output signals NC - PC
Ident.-
Rel. Adr.
- - - - - .-
PC flag 7 6
, Bit number
5 4 3 2 1 0
lumber - - - - - -
PC address /
I
I
I
I I I
c
I-
I
I
---a I ------.
0 0 T/
t EE15. 1 Sprint 8T
MI
(2.6.9.1) (2.6.4) (2.6.3)
----_ Sprint 8M
*Thread *Proqram *Program
cutting end stop N/EMC
Ji3XG63-- ----:102/M30 -4 MOO/Y01
- -- -- -l _ a- 1--2 -1--G-L
A2 (2.5.3) (2.4.5) (2.5.4) (2.6.9.2)
h ------
M23.
---- i ---
*MD1 -
AUTO
-.
*Buffer
store
e.2 -
*Single
block
----
Rapid
traverse
GO0---- - _--i -@L -___iL..--i3~ SM, 8MC
EE17.
iprint 8M
I
(2.5.6) (2.5.5) (2.5.2) IN
4 *Data
transfer
*Manual
data
.
*Automa-
tic
--- -- - - - --\a -- ~LQ---@-
I
A4 (2.5.la)
mm---__ *Return to l Joq/Hand-
N6 M25. wheel
------
EE19.
__ __
t
----
-t
w-s -- - -G2- - - GL -.- - a-
--------. A5 DATA TRANS-
*SPINDLE Al ST/SprintST FER IN
M26. STANDSTILL SOFTWARE PROGRESS 8
(DNC/NC)
NC - PC
-E:lTi:- - -
I
A6
- ---- - _- G9-l
-------
M27. TbUCB PROBE
CONTACT
G96
active active 0
EElB.
A7
------ - 8MC only
M28. @
---- --_
EElC.
A8
--------
--------
M29. 3
EElD.
A9
--------
M30.
e-w----
EEIE. #
:2.4.4) (2.4.2) (2.4.2)
'Datum *Motion *motion
Joint command - command
*eached minus DlUS
Axes: e.q.: BT/Sprint 8T: 0=x, @=z
8N/8M/Sprint 8M/a = X, @=Y, @=z

8MC:
System 8 (N/Z) E.4.84
Output signals NC 4 PC
Rel. addr. Bit number

Ident.-
- kfl-ky - 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Number ---- ---
PC address
Al0 (2.6.14) (2.6.16) (2.6.')

---- - - -_ Spindle *Spindle *Vodulation. sional
M31. Act.rot. peed at speed in oosition (2 6);)
------ --.-GL- - - imjtatian._,_,,_______-L-,_ (2 ZL--6%) C&63) - (2-. far- - .
EE'F. (2.6.13)
All H - word (2.6.8)
--- --
10' 10'
M32.
0
----.------- C B - A ---__ D C
w--z *-________ -- -- - -- -- - --,
A'Z, H - word
--m-e-
TE M33. 103 102
-- 0 C B A D C B A
-I -------------.---------- --- _-_-
iET.--- --
Al3 H - word
-- ----
m 105
M34.
D C B A D C -'f-B- 1 _ -A-_
----------------__-----_---------_---
EE22.
Al4 T - word (2.6.7)

a---
10' 100
N7 -- M35.
D C B A D C
----------------------- a --- - - B -
ET2x- -
Al5 T - word
- - - - - .
103 lo*
M36.
D C B A D C B
--------.----.-----.- - -----
EE24:-- -- - -
Al6 T - word
----- -
105 104
M37.
---- D-_--_____ C B - __--- A D
---------- C B
EE25, - -
Al7 S - word (2.6.5)

-e----e
10' 100
M38.
D C B A D S--b B--. -,A-
----------------------------
EE26.
A18 s- Word
---_--
103 102
M39.
D C B
--- ---- ---- - -A - - D
D-m--- C -B- --A,.
-EE7, - - -
Al9 M - Word (2.6.2)

-- - -- -
10' 100
M40.
-----_------------------------------------ D C B A n C B A
EE28.
Axes: e.g.: 8T/Sprint 8T: @=x, @=z
8N/8M/Sprint 8M/8MC 0 q x, @ = y, @= 2
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
Output signals NC *PC
Rel. adr.
Ident.- ----- - - --
PC flaa 7 6
PC address
Number --------- 151413 *rl"
A20 Active proqram number (2.6.10)

-mm-----
M41. 10' 100
-------- 0 C 6 A n C B A
EE29.
I
1 A21 I Active program number
-------
103 102
M42.
------- 0 C B A n c B A
EEEA.
I
1 A22 I Active UP - number (2.6.11)
v-w-----
10' 100
TE M43.
II C B A D C B Q
YE&,-- -
I
1 A23 I Active UP-number
-------
102
M44.
El ---- - --- D C B A
EEZC.
A24 Transfer Data stored DNC active DNC- O-Buffer I-Buffer

----- - - Data from in I-Buffer NC -&PC Transfer not clear not clear
N8 M45 O-Buffer NC -WC Interrupt NC -&PC NC -bPC
----- --- PC -*NC NC -*PC
EESD
A25 Wo. of data module for I-Buffer (PC -bNC) 130W. 150A dualcoded
----
M4a Absolute address for I-Buffer (PC -&NC) 1505
-------
EEZE
A26 No, of data word for I-Buffer (PC -hNC) 13OW, 150A dualcoded
--------.
H47 Absolute address for I-Buffer (PC -rNC) 1505
---a - - --
EEZF
A27 No. of data module for O-Buffer (PC -*NC) 13OW, 150A dualcoded
--------
M48 Absolute address for O-Buffer (PC -bNC) 150s
------
A28 No, of data word for O-Buffer (PC -*NC) 13OW, 150A dualcoded
-m---m
r -- ----
t M49 Absolute address for O-Buffer (PC -3NC) 150s
EE31
A
--v- ---
---------m
Axes: E.g.: 8T/Sprint 8T: 1 = x, 2 = 2
l 8N/8M/Sprint 8M/ 8MC 1 = x,, 2 = Y, 3 = z
Caution: When using SW02 the PC-program must not

use the flag bytes 45 to 49
System 8 (N/Z) 0 -6
E.4.84
Extension of the operator's panel (User module)

User operator's panel - input signals PC - NC
User operator's panel - output signals NC -) PC
Bit number
1 0
5 I I3 I2
I
I.
I
+
In420 ( IJaf.11
P
m4.19
!A
wt. II
I
w32 In?. :I m4.31 1y12.19 w4.m 1n2.n 1534.29 1~02.22 I I :n4.l9 sa2.2J call aJQ2.i I1
I I1
'h4.+' 'Iy13.1 a4.u wll.1 LW4.41 1W.J

Loqic %dule
I
%500
Bridoe A-B
inSerted
I
!
~60J.22
/tn3.1:1nJ.n Mu.lJ dJ.rn Lml.1, InJ.19 Iz4l.l
J--L
m.32
I
ml.23 lylS.31
!
/
IYn.2 lyIJ.rn
151J.Y
I
I
m3.2l
1JCJ.1.(1 IY5.11
I
ml.29 JrJo3.2-9
E53.41
OJ.2J
3J.W i IJWJ
1
I
I
2W.ll IylJ.2l
WJ.11
1JcU.l
Tya.47
j
Iy11.44 IyY.1 xm.41 194.1 1JOJ.U I5M.5 InJ.*$ In4.l II.44 Isa.9 Isc5.4.3 In4.1
-.L
! I
I
iM.2) ! 1nz.1 w4.n I Iy17.J M.22 w2.1 14.m xnz.11 IyH.19 XY)Z.ll Logic Module
MS500
Bridge A-B
inserted
Iyl4.i3 jIYZ.2J mi.21 lu12.21
E t! Input signal PC-NC

A < Outnut sianal NC -PC
System 8 (N/Z) 0 - 7 E.4.84
User operator's panel - input signals PC - NC

User operator's panel - output signals r4c- PC
Bit number
'E I A 6!s!'!J 1 ' O
Logrc 'iodule
KS00
Bridge B-C
Inserted
.A13
n63. QJ. 0
sa;i-: Ifsx.13 *m.zl 1m.n I!a.n X!a.ll w.3.25 xu5.a xm.27 X50.23 X5ol.19 XW.21 X501.11 X!a27 Xml
3F 4F.
A14
0 1yII. ~1,xYll.a~ II% Y m.31 Is&l9 1wl.n l5os.Y 1501.bl nm.J7 uo3.u no%* m.l.u :=.I3 MI.
Al5
0 Iyn.0 Eul.4, K45.u X504.1 X505.47 IW.1 15a.46 IyY.6 X505.45 Xs4.7 M6.u =.I E4u.l Ish.11
----
---- F-Pl"S. ~504.26!.34?.421.50

connected with MCXt
a X5Q5.2~/.34/.42/.5Q I
X505.1 to .18 am ps internally connected (Logic Vodule)
----, A-Pins. X502.2/.4/.6/.../.50

i503.2/.4/.6/.../.50 connected Internally to the
m--m SUPDIY voltage
X504.2/.4/.6/.8/.10/.~2
X504.(3
I
to .I8 arc connected with Wlnt
--- - Both OutPut liner fkcy Ilner. e.g. X502.1 and X502.2)
should be twlrted together.
-- --
----
---a
The number of bytes can be varied between 0 and 16 (machine parameter).

This number must correspond to the number of input signal/output signal
bytes (see above).
a E ! Input signal PC-NC
A f Output signal NC-PC
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
Signals on the standard operator's panel

Operator's panel - input signals: PC -c NC (8T/Sprint 8T)
Operator's panel - output singals: NC-*PC (8T/Sprint 8T)
Rel. Address
.------ Bit number
Ident.- 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
~p4Esas A_ _
Number PC Address
El A
-
_-
A0
--- P
1-I lzl l!!&l
M82.
_- -
EE52. 1 -
MlOl.
--,
EE65.
0
iten
lent
incre-
I-E
Retrace
I7
Return
datum
Ts
to Set actual
data store
MB1 AUTO
2
---
M83.
Al
- w.
M102. 0 lata trans-
3
Test _
I3
Part nro- Tool off- Zero
I&Ioff-
.-----
4;
input 'er nramm set set
EE53. EE66.
-L Iii & Li ly
qX
A2
TE
s-w
M84.
.--
---
M103.
--- 0 El El q q clG qZ
EE54. f EE67. 9 l-l r; &
A3.---.
.--
M85.
--A
1
M104.
---.
0 qK Unassionell
button
clR qF
EE55. EE68. 17 p I-i Fi
A4
.--
M86.
SW-
--a
M105.
--a
0 IIA
7--
FEE56. EE69. 16 2 ---l
A5
A6
w-e SW.
M88.
_--
M107.
---
0
f EE58. EE6B.
A7
m---m-,
M89. M108. 0
_-----
-LEE59. EE6C.
A8
0 Inout word Edit word Cancel Clear word
- word
?R ?
A9
0 Unassigned Unassinned Unassigned Unassigned
button r 61 button 67 button p4 button F
Sequential button or
.Time-based conditions: Active condition of,each signal 5 65 ms
Passive condition of each signal * 65 ms sui tch number
I I I
No change of status, if CONTROL ACTIVE (2.4.6) is set by the interface control signals.
System 8 (N/2) 0 -9 13.4.84
Operator's panel - input singals: PC *NC (8T/Sprint 8T)

Operator's panel - output singals: NC + PC (8T/Sprint 8T)
Rel.AdcJ~ss-
Bit Number
PC flag
I dent.- --E-!-!-
N umber PC Address
E A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
-------- A10 l-l% *
--M92. -.--,I Ml11 - 0 Rapid over-

ride active
EESC. EE6F. 1
134.1 134,2 134.3 1 (34.5
All 3oOata from memory
-- --- B La c2 53
no Data from tape
M9;.
---
M112.
---
0 Key switch o Data external Single block Block delete Program Dry run
f.data inp. condition
EESD. EE70. lock 152 7;
T;iT 177 155
-
A12
c-l4 - IESI
M94: ti l;.- 0 Forward Reset Rewind to
-- ---- program
EE5E. EE71. Ei-
TE Al3
--- ----
M95. M114. 0 Page back- Page for- Cursor BCursor left Start data
wards wards right transfer
-
59
Al4
M96, iiii : 0 Direction Direction Rapid tra- Direction Direction

button button verse over- button button
EE60. En;.-
Al5 s 0% F W,'IJW
---- ----
M97. M116. 0 Spindle speed override switch Feedrate/ Rapid traverse override switch
EE6i. En:.- Cl= p14[: A140 DE Cl= AF

Al6
Al7
A18
Ml:O. 'Ii-l;.-- 0
----- I
E&T. EE77.
--- -m-m
---.----I
*) The service switch positions 34.1, 34.2, 34.3, 34.4, 34.5, and 33 cannot ,, , t
3equenrial+-
be programmed from the PC. They are set on the operator's panel (see button or
commissioning instructions). witch number
System 8 (N/2) 0 - 10
E.4.84
-Operator's panel 8T /Sprint 8T
The buttons 10 and 11 are unassiqned buttons.
Version with C-Axis
The buttons 10,11,67 and 74 are now designated as shown above.

Rearrangement of the operators panel-keyboard is done by PC-
program I depending on the interface signal "8T/Sprint 8T Software",
M26.5 (e.g. FB 23).
System 8 (N/2) 0 - 11 E.4.84
Operator's panel - input singals: PC - NC (8M/Sprint 8M)

Operator's panel - output signals: NC - PC (8M/Sprint 8M)
Rel.Address
-------- Bit number
dent.- PC flaq
umber --- E 1 ---- A
PCE Address
1 A 7 6 5 4 3
A0 ?r
e--e---- I Y- 1
MlOl. 0 Stea incre- Retrace
-- MB2. -<---- -
tiandwheel ment
EE52. EE65. (79 pz p
I Al I I
IMZlnual data 1 Automatic IData trans- I Test

input fer
TE I
h---w
A2
w-w
I
MB4. M103. 0
----v----
EE54. EE67.
-------- A3
M85. M104. 0
--a------
EE55. EE68.
------we A4
M86. M105. 0
---.-w---
EE56. EE69.
-mm A5 -mm
fla7. M106. 0
-- ---
EE57. EE6A.
b--l--
A8
-- --me
0
M90. M109.
-- a---
EE5A. EE6D.
A9
-- mm- Unassigned
button
Unassigned
button
Unassigned
button
Unassigned
button
t T EE5B. EE6E. 135 po 145
Time based conditions: Active condition of each signal t 65 ms

Passive condition of each signal g 65 ms
Example: NllO
0 I I
No change of status, when CONTROL ACTIVE (2.4.6) is set by the interface control signals.
System 8 (N/Z) 0 - 12 E.4.84
Operator's panel - input signals: PC -c NC (8M/Sprint 8M)

Operator's panel - output signals: NC -W PC (8M/Sprint 8M)
Re1.Addrk.s
-------- Bit Number
PC flag
Ident.- E 1 A
---e--m-
lumber
PC Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
A10
---q--s -
-- M92. -.-D-mMill. -
EE5C. EE6F.
EE5D. EE70.
*A--c- Al2 - --
TE M94. M113. 0
--s-m -w-e
Spindle speed override switch Feedrate override s
erride switch
Axis selector switch 1
Sequential button or
*) The service switch positions 47.1, 47.2, 47.3, 47.4, and 46 cannot be switch ""lnber
l
programmed from the PC. They are set on the operator's panel (see
commissioning instructions).
Operator's panel 8M/Sprint 8M

System 8 (N/2) 0 - 14 E.4.84
Operator's panel - input signals: PC + NC (8MC) a

Operator's panel - output signals: NC * PC (8MC)
1-------
Rel.Address I "2L I I.
D II-..-Le._
" Ill " e r I
dent.- PC flag
t- - I _ I
I I I I I 1 I
0 1 / ;irze, iiL;?!cre- Ret%! k?~to S?Ei;

, .._.. - --1791 -..-
1 EE52.t EE65. 1 I pz pE 192 173
p&J-
EE53.1 EE66. 1
O Manual
innut
I-"--
Dl
n
data
170
i-3
Automatic
pi-
fer
*m
lzfl
Data trans-
171
Test
a
Part
l
program Tool
-1
l&l
offset Zero
set
I&I
off-
pT
I
I I I l-7 L-l
TE l-3
N
Unassigned I El
I3
-------A3'
M85. M104. 0 Unassigned ILI N.l EJ l.3 Unassign
--m------ button button
EE55. EE68. I;;;- 19 IiF 6 jT
I
A4
U Lx-l I__(
M87. M106.
--- .-s-s-
EE57. EE6A. iii-
I I I
A6
--- WC--
El El El El
M88. M107. 0
-- -es-
,-iEE58. EECB, .
I A7 I
/EE59~lEE6C. /
Time based conditions: Active condition of each signal z 65 ms Sequential button or

Passive condition of each signal - 65 ms switch number
Example: NllO
'.I
a
1 I I I
C I
System 8 (N/2) 0 - 15 E.4.84
Operator's panel - input signals: PC w NC (8~0

Operator's panel - output signals: NC -) PC (8MC)
Rel.Address
w---B---
PC flag Bit Number
dent.- E 1 A
--------
'umber
PC Address 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
E IA
A10
--- ----
*I *I 4 *I *I -1
-- M92. -.---- Mill. - 0
EESC. EE6F.
TE
Al6 IJln
--- -e-w Rapid traverse override switch
IM98.
---
, EE62. f
Al7
M117.
--mm
EE75.
0
A197.2
0 Axis selector switch 1
0 Axis selector switch 2

m---w
n6;; CE SIT4 AE
..-
-------
--------
cc%**.+4 -1 CI,,++n. -
l The service switch positions 47.1, 47.2, 47.3, 47.b, 47.5 and 46 cannot be programmed from the PC. switch number
They are set on the operator's panel. (See commissioning instructions).
System 8 (N/2) 0 - 16 E.4.84
Operator's panel 8MC 0
0
System 8 (N/Z) 0 - 17 E.4.84
Signals on the standard operator's panel

Operator's panel - input signals: PC -NC (8~)
Operator's panel - output signals: NC -PC (8N)
Rel.Address
Ident,- ---- - ---
PC flag Bit Number
Vumber --- E 1 ---- A
PC Address
E ,A 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
a--..---- 0
M82.
A0
MlOl. Jw Step-incre-
Lp-1
Retrace Set actual MD1 - AUTO
-- -.---- - Handwheel ment datum data store
EE52. EE65.
r;;
Al
- ---
M83. M102.
.- ---
0 Manual data Automatic Tool off- Zero off-
input fer
EE53. EE66. p7
A2
TE
b-m*-
-----m-w*
M84.
-a*
M103. 0
q O"
EE54. EE67. p
------- A3
M85.
---------
M104. 0
EE55. EE68. [iT
A4
--------
M86.
-e-.--w--
M105. 0
EE56. EE69. 718 7(12 116
7 7120 -
I18
A5
----B-m-
M87.
-mm
M106.
.-e-s-
- 0
EE57. EE6A.
A7
0
F
A8
---s-w-- E5l clH
M90.
--------
M109. 0 Input Edit Cancel Clear
A9
--------
Mgl. YllO.
0 Unassigned
button
Unassigned
hutton
i;;;;Agned ;;;;;;gned
-w-.--e-.
*1
FFfiF. ET.
Time-based conditions: Active condition of each signal 65 ms *) f.e. use for direction
Passive condition of each signal 65 ms buttons (+3, -3)
Example: NllO
Sequential but&
or switch number
I I-
System 8 (N/Z) 0 - 18 E.4.84
Operator's panel - input signals: PC - NC (8N)

Operator's panel - output signals: NC -) PC (8~)
I
Rel.Address
m---m--- Bit Num bet-
I&?nt.- PC flaa
Number E
----v-e- IA
PC Address
E , A 7 6
I
5 4 4
3 I 2 I I O
---..---
A10
-
*I *I 0) 0)
M92.
-- -s---v
Mill.
-
0
EE5C. EE6F. I *:A l Isn.z (34.3 Ine.4 134.5 1
--p--m-
All 0 Data
o Data
from memory
from tape
BJ a ki) 3
M93.
----w-m
M112. 0 data inpu
0 Data external Single
block
Block
delete
Programmed Dry run
EE5D. EE70. lock j7r p.7 P

A12. -4
Dl i-4 El
TE
0 Forward Reset Rewind
program
to
-~ ~~~ I
/?i
!-I 7
1 start (65
---
Al3
-- - -- clt
M95.
m--m-----
M114. 0 Page for- Page bach- Cursor Cut-L?
left
I StartLa data
transfer
I led I
wards wards right
EE5F. EE72'. k jz j-z f
-.
Al4 ', X- @JyTJ
-1,-m-..- Ll
M96..
---.-s---
Ml15. 0 Direction Direction Direction
button
Direction
button
Direction
button
Direction
button
button button
EE60. EE73. b jzi p )52 11 1)
Al5 F w% 1Rp/o
----e-w- - Feedrate/Rapid traverse override switch
i--
M97. M116.
.-m--w
0
EE61. EE74.
--- Al6
--- ----
M98.
m-e
M117.
w-e-
0
EE62. f EE75.
Al7
---em
M99. Ml18.
0
--- ----
---IEE63. EE76.
Al8
---s---w
0
L--l-It
MlOO. M119.
--------
EE64. EE77.
---1----
---------
I I I I
*) The service swit h positions 34.1,& 34.2, 34.4, 34.3, 34.5, and 33 cannot
be progrmmed from the PC. They are set on the operator's panel (see ~:q~$k~'n~$:
commissioning instructions).
1) Designation of unassigned buttons (e.g. 74/80) is done by parametric
programming of function module TASTANNC.
0 - 19 E.4.84
System 8 (N/2)
l Operators panel EN
System 8 (N/Z) 0 - 20 E.4.84
PC display parameters
(see 2.8.4)
Machine data N437 Bit 3=0
de&. Addr.) sit - N-r

-e-w
tdrrc- JCflaJ _ ' 6 5 4 I 2 1 0
w
PC-Addr.
---- A0 1 Byte for PC display coordination

---- Ml20. (Byte t 0: Transfer PC display data
s7a.
Byte = 0: Transfer finished) (2.8.4 a)
Al absolute address (1505)
--mm 1 byte for data module no., (13OW, 15OA) (2.8.4.b)
--A- Ml21 E 7
f-I2 26 25 24 23 22 2' 2O
E79. 3
gybsolute address (150s)
--- A2 - '1 byte for the relative information start of data in the module
n x122.
J (13Oti, 150A) (2.8.4.b)
-w-w 22 7 26 25 I 24 23 I 22 2' 2O
EZ7A.
_ A3_ - _ .:I Byte for the location of info on display (32-255) (2.8.4 d)
f4?23. 4Jl
3l- -
EE73.
- - 2;
31 27 26 25 24 23 22 2' 2O
.
--- AL
- '$1 Bypte for the info length (number of characters) (2.8.4 d)
bll2L
--L- 2127 1 26 1 25
EZ?C. ! 1
Machine data N437 Bit 3=1
A0 rona PC erase
401120 32 ervx PC data erase 1 bit for
I characters illpIt
~~~~~~~KI characters check p*beut dlrplay PC-display
H 15 .- in input une
exceeded (2.8.6.lj cooed.
line l tw input 12.6.6.2)
(2.8.6.5) (2.8.6.1) (2.8.4.a)
-- - - 12.8.6.6)
1
(2.6.6.3)
EEB.
I I I I I 1 I
absolute address (150s)

l2.8.4.b/2.8.6)
1 byte for data module no. (13OfJ, 15OA)
Ml21,
-- 1
7!7 1 26 1 25 / 2 ( 2 1 2 ( 2 2
cc79.
I I I 1 I 1 I
A2 absolute address (15OSl
-- 1 byte for the relative information start of data in the module
llz t4122. (13OW, 150A) I2.6.4.cf2.6.6l
-- 2' 26 I 25 24 23 22 2' 2O
m7n.
A3
--54 --4
1 Byte for the location of info on display (32-255) (2.8.4.d)
n123.
--
m70.
-. 27
I
26
I
25
I
24
I
23 1 22 1 2 1 20
$
A4
d 1 Byte for info length (number of characters) (2.8.4.e/2.8.6)
--- 3124. dJ 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 20
---ECC.
-1
System 8 (N/Z) 00 - 1 E.4.84
00 Interface signals for extended VDI interlace
E i Input signal A t Output signal
Signal description Chapter Circuit diagram PC STEP I/O E = I/P A = O/P

description address
* 4th axis = main axis (2.9.13) EEOC.0 Ml2.0 E

Axis coding (2.11.2) EEl2.0-.3 M18.0-.3 E
Axis inhibit (2.12.1) (EE02.-
EEOB).S !:02-M11) E
* Axis changeover (2.9.17) EEOD.6 M13.6 E
* Additive zero offset (2.11.5.31 EE10.2 M16.2 E
Active program no. (2.6.10) EE29.0-.7 M41.0-.7 A
EE2A.O-.7 M42.0-.7
Active subroutine no. (2.6.11) EE2B.O-.7 M43.0-.7 A
*Requirement for black .change.deTay (2.9.14) ;; $\-.3 Ml4&-.3
ib t
* Interface control alarm (2.11.3.VI) EEi2:2 I.11 7 :2 E
* Automatic (2.5.2) EE18.4 M24.4 A
Input via 1st operator's panel (2.8-l) EEOC.3 1112.3 E

Operator lock (keyswitch) (3.5)
* NC without active operator's
panel (2.8.2) EEOC.2 M12.2 E
*NC ready 1 2.4.1.1) EE15.4 1121.4 A
*NC ready 2 2.4.1..!)
NC ready 2 SW chapter 11 A
4.1)
1st byte for external data input ii 2.11.1) EE13.0-.7 Ml9.0-.7 E
2nd byte for external data input (2.11.11 EE14.0-.7 M20.0-.7 E
1 byte for data module no. (2.8.4b) EE79.0-.7 M121.0-.7 E
1 byte for PC display coordination (2.8.4a) EE78.0-.7 M120.0-.7 E/A
1 byte for information start on
the display (2.8.4d) EE7B.O-.7 M123.0-.7 E
SYst~ 8 (N/2) 00 - 2 E.4.84
a
Signal description Chapter Circuit diagam PC STEP 'I/O E = I/P A = O/P
description address
1 byte for information length (2.8.4e) EE7C.O-.7 M124.0-.7 E

1 byte for relative information
start in the data module (2.8.4~) EE7A.O-.7 M122.0-.7 E
1 byte for data module number (2.8.4b) EE79.0-.7 F1121.0-.7 E
* Data fransfer (2.5.6) EE18.6 M24.6 A
* Display information from PC (2.8.3) EEOC.4 1112.4 E
Velocity controller ready (5.1.1) SERVO READY see chapter 11 E
Speed conunand value - t;.g.;; cvs see chapter 11 A
. .
* Rapid traverse GO0 (2.6.9.2: EE17.4 M23.4 A

Data input
panel
via 1st operator's
(2.8.1) EEOC.3 fil2.3 E 0
* Data input enable (2.9.1) EEOD.7 M13.7 E
* Single block (2.5.4) EE17.5 M23.5 A
Limit switch - minus (2.9.7) (EE02- (M02-Mll). E
EEOB).l
Limit switch - plus (2.9.7) (EE02- (M02- E
EEOB).O Mll).O
2nd software limit switch -
X active (2.9.9) EEOC.7 M12.7 E
1st byte for external data input (2.11.1) EE13.0-.7 M19.0-.7 E
2nd byte for external data input (2.11.1) EE14.0-.7 M20.0-.7 E
External deceleration (2.9.6) EEOE.7 M14.7 E
l Motion command - minus (2.4.2) (EE15- (M21- A

EElE).l M30).1
* Motion command - plus (2.4.2) (EE15- (M21- A
EElE).l M30).0
* Gear
* Thread
coding
cutting G33/G63
(2.10.5)
(2.6.9.1)
.-
EEOE.4-.6
EE16.6
M14.4-.6
M22.6
E
A a
a
System 8 (N/2) 00 - 3 E.4.84
Signal description Chapter Circuit diagram PC STEP I/O E = I/P A = O/P -

description address
* Manual data input (2.5.5) EE18.5 M24.5 A

* H: ChBnQFi signal (2.6.5.2) EElF.0 M31.0 A
* Jog/Ha'ndwheel (2.5.la) EE19.4 M25.4 A
Auxiliary function output inhibit (2.12.2) EEOF.5 1115.5 E
H-Word (2.G. 0) EEZO.O-.7 M32.0-.7 A
EEZl.O-.7 M33.0-.7
EE22.0 -. 7 M34.0-.7
1 byte for information start on
the display (2.8.4d) EE7B.O-.7 M123.0-.7 E
1 byte for relative information
start in data module (2.8.4~) EE7A.O-.7 M122.0-.7 E
1 byte for information length (2.8.4e) EE7C.O-.7 M124.0-.7 E
* Set actual value store (2.5.le) EE18.7 M24.7 A
* Gear coding (2.10.5) EEOE.4-.6 M14.4-.6 E

* Jog/Ha?dwheel (2.5.la) EE19.4 M25.4 A
* Cancel diet&co to go (2.9.y5j EEOC.1 M12.1 E
* TT-. Change signal (2.6.6;2) EElF.3 M31.3 A

* w!I /?uto (2.5.3) EE17.7 M23.7 A
* Synchronous axis traverse (2.11.310) EE1l.O M17.0 c
M-Word (2.6.2) EE28.0-.7 M40.0-.7 A
* Follow-up modo (2.9.8) (EEOZ- (MOZ- E

EEOB).G M11).6
* NC ready 1 (2.4.1.1') EE15.4 M21.4 A
* NC ready 2 3.;jlJ2) NC-READY S see chapter 11 A
* NC ON i P .
* NC without active operator's
panel (2.0.2) EEOC.2 M12.2 E
NC Start (2.7.2) ECOC.6 M12.C E
System 8 (~/2) 00 - 4 E.4.84
Signal oescriptlon Chapter Circuit diagram PC bit? l/U t = I/P A - O/P

I I description I address I
IEmergency Stop (2.7.1) EEOC.5 M12.5 E

IEmergency Stop (3.1)
c Emergency Stop (5.1.2) * EMERG STOP See chapter 11 E
t Additive zero offset (2.11.3.3) EE10.2 M16.2 E
k Zero offset group (2.9.10) EEOF.3/.4 Ml5.3l.4 E
1 byte for PC display coordination (2.8.4a) EE78.0-.7 Ml20.0-.7 E/A
k Program end M02/M30 (2.6.4) EE16.5 M22.5 A
l Programned stop MOO/El01 (2.6.3) EE16.4 M22.4 A
* Program active (2.4.3) EE15.7 M21.7 A
* Program no. (2.11.3.4 EE10.3 fi16.3 E
Active program no. (2.6.10) EE29.0-.7 M41.0-.7 A
EE2A.O-.7 M42.0-.7
* Reference (datum) point reached (2.4.0) (EEl5- (M21- A

EElE).L M30).2
k Return to datum (2.5.ld) EE19.7 M25.7 A
* Datum point no 1 (2.11.3.9: EEll.l Ml7.1 E
0
* Controller enable (2.9.4) (EE02- (M02-
EEOB).2 Mll).2 E
* Controller inhibit ';.;.;$ SES see chapter 11 A
. .
* Cancel remaining sub-routine
repetitions (2.9.16) EEOF.7 M15.7 E
* Cancel remaining distonco to go (2.9.15) EEOC.1 M12.1 E
* R-parameter word 1 (2.11.3.i: EE11.5 M17.5 E
* R-parameter word 2 (2.11.3b7: EEll.6 M17.6 E
1! R-parameter word 3 (2.11.3.3: EEll.7 M17.7 E
* Reposition (retrace) (2.5.1~) EE19.6 M25.6 A
EElF.2 I.131 . 2
M22.9
E796*57
. t125.5 k
System 8 (N/2) 00 - 5 E.4.84
~-
Signal description Chapter ircuit diagram PC STEP I/O E q l/P A q u/P
escription address
Cycle inhibit (2.8.5) EEOF.6 M15.6 E

* Mirror image (2.9.18) EEOF.O-.2 M15.0-.2 E
Spindle OFF/ON (3.2)
Spindle speed limit (2.6.13) EElF.6 M31.6 A
Spindle Stop (2.10.4) EEOE.0 M14.0 E
* S cond ramp value for spindle (2.10.1) EEOE.3 M14.3 E
* SpF s'%%?'~peed 2.6.15) EElF.5 t131.5 A
Actual spindle rotation clock-
wise 2.6.13) EElF.7 M31.7 A
* Spindle oscillate (2.10.2) EEOE.2 M14.2 E
* Spindle in position (2.6.14) EElF.4 M31.4 A
Spindle rotation command clock-
wise (2.10.3) EEOE.1 M14.1 E
2nd software limit switch -
X active (2.3.9) EEOC.7 M12.7 E
* S-Spindle speed command (4.'3.1) EE10.6 M16.6 E
2.113.6)
* NC start (2.7.2) EEOC.6 M12.6 E
Start (3.6)
Control active (2.4.6) EE15.6 M21.6
S-Word (2.6.5) EE26.0-.7 M38.0-.7
EE27.0-.7 H39.0-.7
* Synchronous axis traverse (2.11.3.t EE1l.O M17.0
* T- Change signal (2.6.5) EElF.1 W31 . 1

T-Word (2.6.7) EE23.0-.7 M35.0-.7
EE24.0-.7 M36.0-.7
EE25.0-.7 M37.0-.7
Active sub-routine no. (2.6.11) EE20.0-.7 M43.0-.7 A

EFPC.O-.3 M44.0-.3
I
* Cancel remaining sub-routine
repetition (2.9.16) EEOF.7 M15.7 E
I
System 8 (N/2) 00 -6 E.4.84
Signal description Chapter Circuit diagram PC STEP I/O E = I/P A = O/P

description address
External deceleration (2.9.6) EEOE.7 M14.7 E

Oeceleration (during return
to datum) (2.9.5) (EE02- (M02- E
EEOl3).4 M11).4
* Feed enable (axis specific) (2.9.3) (EE02- (M02-
EEOB).3 M11).3 E
* General feed enable (2.9.2) EEOD.0 M13.0 E
Feed hold/start (3.3)
* Feedrate reduction 1 : 100 (2.9.12) EEOD.l M13.1 E
* Feedrate multiplication factor (2.9.11). EEOD.2-.5 M13.2-.G E
* Feed-word 1 (2.11.3.5) EE10.4 M16.4 E
* Feed-word 2 (2.11.3,s) EE10.5 M16.5 E
* Tool offset (2.11.3.1) EE1O.O M16.0 E
* Supplementary offset (2.11.3.2) EE10.1 M16.1 E

* Buffer store empty (2.4.5) EE17.6 t123.6 A
Cycle inhibit (2.8.5) EEOF.6 M15.6 E
System 8 (N/2) 1 -1 13.4.84
1. Connections
1.1. Installation
1.1.1 NC comEonentg&r&
--- --
The SINUMERIK System 8 controls comprise the following

Components:
- Logic section with integrated PC
- Operator's panel
- Logic module (Extension to the operators panel)
- Position display
- Tape reader
- Hand wheels
- Extension rack
The drawings on pages l-2, l-3 and l-4 show the possible
NC - PC module layouts
System 8 (N/2) 1 -2 E.4.84
Overview of System 8-8MC with an integrated Overview IV

PC 150 (basic control 2) and its possibilities
PU interf aoe
NC PC150 module
Interpolation/position control MS300

Central processor MS100
Users memory
NC MS121/MS125
Power supply MS140
A Bus connection nodule NC/PC MS760 max 6 position loop modules

- MS300/MS310 for a pair of
is supplied withBasic Control 2
the axes
as well as an extension port for the
central extension rack See overview 1
Memory module Extension rack
When connecting a
de-centralised extension
rack EG181 with its
power supply
see overview II
EPROM module Digital inputs
370 Digital outputs

System 8 (N/2) 1 -3 E.4.84
erview of System 8 - ET, Sprint ET, 8M Overview V

rint EM, EN with an integrated PC 150
(basic control 2)
PU interface
PC150
Interpolation/position control/position lo
MS200/MS230
Users memory
NC MS121/MS125 -
Power supply MS 140
0
The PC 150 memory capacity
can be up to 24K of
instructions when both a
370 and 350 module is
fitted (see option)
A Bus connection module

NC/PC.MS760 is supplied
the basic control 2 as
well as an extension pert
for the central extension rack
See Overview I
Memory module
When connecting a
de-centralised extensio
l rack EG182 with its
power supply, see
Overview II
Digital inputs EPROM module
Digital oUtpUtS 370
System B (N/2) 1 -4 E.4.84
Overview of System 8 - BT, Sprint BT, 8M

Overview VI
Sprint BN, BN with an integrated PC
130W (Basic control 3)
PU Interface module 511-5

PC 130w
NC
Programming unit
Interpolation/position control/
position loop NS200/NS230 -1 ) ,cable for 'I1 m"*
Users memory NC NS121/NSl25 1 I I I IT--- cp
Power supply MS140 L
L -
fn the Basic Control
370 EPROM module,
of instructions
space
are available
3 with
for 4K
in
a
0,SK RAN on the CPU module. 0

The PC 130 max memory size is to
16K instructions with a memory
extension module 350 and module
370. (see also options 1
A Bus connection module

MS760 is supplied with the
Basic Control 3 as well as
an extension part for the
central extension rack
See Overview I
u
fiemory module 1 1 Memory module1
! 350-3
$$I (RAN/EPRo )
I$l'
b'!l :
:: +I
,:'
Digital inputs EPROM mo

Digital outputs 370
System 8 (N/2) 1 -5 E.4.84
l 1.1.1.1 Mountin&
Instructions for installation are given in the individual dimension

drawings. In the case of the operator's panel there are installation
instructions for enclosed mounting and ventilation,
System 8 (N/Z) 1 -6 ~.4.84
1.1.1.2 Cables and plugs
Individual component parts must be connected using the specified types

of cable (see Cable and Equipment Summary in Chapters 8.2, 9.2, and 10.2)
The maximum cable lengths are given in the Cable and Equipment Summary
and the Accessories Lists (8.3, 9.3, and 10.3)
The cables to the machine and interface. control must be mechanically
protected (e.g., in a cable duct or trunking)
Ingress of oil, coolant or swarf must be prevented.
Do not run signal cables in parallel with power cables.
Cables associated with other control circuits must not be brought into
the logic sections.
The cables for System 8 fall into 4 categories and require 3 different
sized plugs.
'l) Cable 8 x 2 x 0,18 mm2,external diameter 9,5 mm, with twisted pairs,
and used in conjunction with 15 way plugs
2) Cable 13 x 2 x 0,18 mm2,external diameter 10 mm, with twisted pairs,

and used in conjunction with 25 way plugs.
3) Cable 21 x 2 x 0,18 mm2,external diameter 10 mm, with twisted pairs,

and used in conjunction with 50 way plugs.
4) Cable 50 x 0,18 mm2,external diameter 10 mm, and used in conjunction

with 50 way plugs.
A plug must be fitted to the other end of the cable suitable for
the external device.
Cable construction where undertaken by the customer must comply with our
specificatons with regard to cable-construction and diameter.
System 8 (N/2) 1 -7 E.4.84
Plug requirements
1) The 15, 25 and 50 way plugs must conform to "International Standards

and the casings to the SINUMERIK soecif'ication.
2) The plugs must be secured by screws to the module front plates.

The faces of the plugs must be in full contact with the modules front
plates.
3) Strain relief must be provided by the plug itself.
4) The plugs must be marked to prevent insertion into the wrong socket.
5) There must be ground contact between the cable screen and the electronic
SINUMERIK ground via the casing-spring in the plug. This overcomes
the old problem of the screens becoming detached.
Build Instructions
It is imperative to use SIEMENS' sub-miniature plugs at the SINUMERIK end of

the cables as no other suitable alternatives are available.
On pages l-8 - I-II of this interface description, there is a section

devoted to plugs. The customer must follow these instructions, in order to
obtain satisfactory functioning of the control, if he manufactures his own
cables.
suominiature plug
< shoe
qlampin
cable clamo
I i-n---N-t----I
-4
Screen
ben back 180' over
steel tube and trimmed
\Steel tube IOmm long
uniform diameter for
on Elastomer. This
provides
laying
ensures
03
off level with end of even pressure of the screen

steel tube case on the Elastomer and
cable screen.
4:l
Scale M
.
total cable strip lb
.
Wpol.: 37 mm co
25-pol.: 37 l m Assembly drawing: Cable/Subminiature plug. lb
50-pal.: 45 mm
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 9 E.4.84
63 4
553
- f
?
s
c Scale : 1:l
Installation diagram
Cf?O,Zl PbO,ZI 0(10,2) RllO.2)
33.3 20.8 11,4 3.4
33.3 30,5 12.3 2.1
15 pin socket (dimensions same for plug)
Subminiature 15 pin socket (complete with housing): Ident no 6FC9 341-IEC

Subminiature 15 oin housina: Ident no 400 90 802
System 8 (N/2) - 10 E.4.84
Scale : 1:l
c(to.21 Pii0.2) 0110.2t R(iO,Zl
25 47,0 42.5 11,4 3.4
25 47.0 44.3 12.3 2.1
Subminiature 25 pin socket (complete with housing): Ident no 6FCg 341-IED

Subminiature 25 pin housing: Ident no 40090 851
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 11 E.4.84
1
t I-
* In
Scale : ,:,
Subminiature 50 pin socket (complete with housing): Ident no 6FC9 341-IEE

Subminiature 50 pin housing: Ident no 400 90 908
System 8 (~/2) I- 72 E.4.84
1.1.1.3
Mains supply
Mains voltages:
220v - 15% t0 230~ - lo%, single phase (phase/neutral) for system
with neutral which can be loaded or 2 phase (phase/phase) when
neutral cannot be loaded.
For other voltages: matching autotransformer required
Frequency: 50 Hz - 3% to 60 Hz + 3%
Power consumption: approx. 620 VA

for Operators pane?. and logic rack
Permissible voltage interruptions:

max. 10 ms for rated voltage U:,
max. 3 ms for UN - 15%
Permissible mains harmonics:

Sum of 2nd to 5th harmonic: 0.1 UN
Sum of 6th to 30th harmonic: 0.02U~
System B (N/2) 1 - 13 E.4.84
1.1.1.4 Mains Connections
Mains connections of each component or of the SINUMERIK

cabinet is effected with 220/230 V, 50/60 Hz at the
terminal board.
For connecting use cables 3x2,5 mm'.
Surplus cores must be connected in parallel with the others.
Mains connection of logic components or compact cabinet
Terminal' striFX~ PE Ll 1 2
c:
Cable
terminations L
T-N+, Earthing
bolt MS
Logic rack
Mai3n;2y;le I
, I I 1
NC-on
L!J
Contact markings-
when a Mains-ON-Module is I
fitted
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 14 E.4.84
Mains connection for the 1500mm standard cabinet
Cable terminals
Xl is in the
cabinet
1 .l 1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Screw
PE
F* Ll
.
Mains
The mains connection for the operator*s panel is via terminal block X408
Terminal block
X408 Ll PE L2/N
Reader mains connection
Terminal block 1 2 3141

X603 Ll L2/N PE Int. ground
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 15 E.4.84
External position displays mains COnnECtiOn
Terminal block p-/-T/q

Ll PE L2/N
SINUMERIK cabinet mains connection
Terminal block
5
Ground rail
1.1.1.5 Switch-on sequence, switch-on conditions
The NC - ON push button closes the circuit via a screened cable

between terminals 1 and 2 (see also 1.1.1.5)
The ON - button must be pressed longer than 500 msec., but no
longer than approx. 2 sec.
System El (N/2) 1 - 16 E.4.84
Switch on conditions a
- All cant-rol components can have voltage applied to them before the logic
rack or) at worst, all voltages must be provided simultaneously.
- If the NC has an iktegrated PC and an extension rack with its own power
supply, the extension rack power supply must be switched on first
(For a decentralised external interface - EG182 - 3KB61 see also 9.7,
Overview II).
Recommendation
c
Logic rack EG182-3K861
PE Ll N/12 1 2
0 0
/ - II
I
\
.ns
-Jl (
NC-ON
Mains
System 8 (N/Z) 1 - 17 E.4.84
- The 24 V PC power supply, for the machine inputs and outputs, must be
switched on before the PC.
- When an extension rack without a power supply, EG 182 - 3KB01, is used

(see 9.7 Overview I) a fan check to a PC input must be incorporated.
Extension racks with power supplies have an inbuilt checking circuit.
Mains-connection of extension-units with built in power supply
Mains-terminals for power supply

Fan 1 Fan 2 FRG (Enable)
+2UJ av
24v-supply
for
peripheral
PE I control
22ov circuits
5aHz
Mains terminals fan Terminals for fan monitoring

circuits
Connecting power supply and fan FRG: +24 V e Enabled

0 V e Disabled
with fan monitoring alarm, the power supply is shut off at its primary
side. In case direct shut off is not required or wanted, the terminal
3 may be connected to a peripheral input. The power supply terminal
FRG is then to be controlled by a peripheral output. The power supply
must be disabled no later than 60sek. following FRG response.
For further information see handbook SIMATIC S5.
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 18 E.4.84
1.1.1.6 PE (Earth) connections
Each control component requires earthing via its PE mains terminal
All PEts should be commonad off to a common rail on the machine as

laid down in the EVU regulations (earthing)
The common PE rail is also the common point for the PE connections
from the machine cabinets with a IO mm2 cable.
machine hardware (e.g. column ate) with a 16 mm2 cable,
as wall as the other devices, including motors and transformer
screens. The PE cables must be as short as possible.
All control components have internal

an reference, M internal,
connected to the casings, and are earth protected.
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 19 E.4.84
1.1.1.7 Measures to reduce interference
In addition to the VDE measures for earth protecting equipment,

additional measures are required to ensure interference free
operation. These measures include screened signal cables, special
potential equalisation cables and M connections.
Screened siqnal cables
To ensure interference free equipment operation, specially designed

screened cables are used. Cable and plug information is seen in
the sections on cables (sec. 11) and plugs (sec. 1.1.1.2). The I
special Siemens' plugs connect the cable screens to the plug casings
and then to the reference point. All control components with their
respective power supplies are referenced to their own casings and then
on to the common reference point.
The screens are therefore connected throuqh the plugs. Where the
screen cannot be th#rouqh connected, for reasons of construction,
4 wcurrent path cables must be provided to equalise the potentials.
They must be connected to both sides of the housings
For devices without power supplies but which have 5V supplied to them,
from the respective control components (e.g. ROD encoders or
extension racks 6ES5182-3KBOl), the screens are not connected at the
device ends. This is because the device cannot be isolated when
mounted on the machine. E potential equalisation cable must be inserted.
The reference po.tential M must not be connected to the housings.
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 20 E.4.84
This must be separately connected via the signal cable to the

reference potential on the respective component.
Components from the SIMATIC S5 range are screen connected as shown

on page 1 - 21.
Cables carrying low frequency signals (e.g. to the relay interface)

are screened in the cabinet, on a rail. (One side of the screen
is connected to the logic rack, MSIOO).
Where signals are run singly, e.g. from switching devices (Digital
inputs/outputs to the PC), they are not screened. These signals need
to be in a separate trunking end separated from current carrying cables.
Note: SIMOREG thyrisbr and transistor controllers have internal

floating earths and are referenced via the. commend output connections
of the NC to the internal reference point M in the control,
System I3 (N/2) 1 - 21 E.4.84
Special M connections
The feed and main spindle (SIMOREG) devices must be tied potentially to the
logic rack.
The 24V loading of the PC digital inputs/outputs and the logic modules must
be measured and defined.
For better division of these two requirements, the inclusion of a M screen as

shown in the figures is recommended.
Cable manufacture
A section of the cable insulation is cut
out radially with a knife so that the screen
can be connected to the clamp attached to
the flexible cable.
Only for the modules
6ES5 310, 390, 501, 511, 512
M-Connection is provided within
SIMOREG Terminal 1 or Warning: the cable to the logic rack
ground rail The M- of the SIMOREG
transistor devicdgtis not connected
controller to the chassis
M
1 SIMOREG
\
Logic
n-Comand
I
rack
values
C4#
as short as possible
Power
24V
supply
Extension rack
w
\
Machine
Operator's
Mext.
Logic
Mext.
0
Module
panel
24V
24V 24V
Copper Rail
r O???
I I I I
A
I.
1 M - Rail
7
I r, 1
I low power area High power area
I I M
.
V24 device PC ext. 1 1 bb
Op. panel
Reader .
co
bc.
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 23 E.4.84
1.1.1.8 Mechanical and climatic requirements
Oparator~s Panel
a) Forced cooling
Ambient Air temperature ,L -I- 55Oc
Temperature at front 4 + 45C
Temperature change max I,1 K/min
Permissible air humidity to class F to DIN 40040
Air intake free of aggressive gases
Enclosed protection to DIN 40050: front: IP54, rear::IPO
b) Enclosed
Ambient Air temperatures -t- 45C
Air intake free of aggressive gases
Enclosure protection to DIN 40050: front IP54
Loqic rack with inteqrated PC
Ambient air temperatures + 55C

Volume of air 800 m3/hr
Air intake free of aggressive gases.
Enclosure protection to DIN 40050: IP50
Tape reader without reels
Ambient air temperature s-t 45C

Permitted humiditys 75%
Air circulation without aggressive gases
Protection : IPO
Weight : 12,5 kg
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 24 E.4.84
Tape reader with reels
Ambient air temperatures+ 45C

Permitted humidity s 75%
Protection: IPO
Weight: 21 kg
Additional build information can be extracted frbm the dimension

drawings.
1.1.2 NC cabinet
1.1.1.2 Standard cabinet 1500mm
The tape reader and operators panel are integrated into the front
door whidh gives access to the inside of the cabinet. If the
operator*s panel is to be mounted externally, the hole left by the
operators panel is covered with steel sheet (see dimension drawings).
A heat exchanger is mounted on the rear cabinet wall. The heat
exchanger works effectively with a 15 K temperature difference.
In addition to the three components, operatorts panel, Logic rack

and Tape reader, there is sufficient room for a K form extension
rack and modules from the SIMATIC 55 range, with power dissipation of
max 200W (see ST53). There is also room for the 24V power supply
which supplies the input and output peripheral modules.
System 8 (N/2) 1 - 25 E.4.84
Cables
Only use the cable types as described earlier. Position feed back and
drive controller cables can enter the cabinet from the top or from
underneath.
No separate entries are provided. The plug fastenings can support the
cables weight.
The power supply conditions apply as described in section 1.1.1.3
1.1.2.2 Compact cabinet
The compact cabinet is only large enough to house the logic rack of a
System 8 (see dimension drawing). The cabinet is protected to IP54
standards and also contains a heat exchanger.
Technical data:
Heat exchanger volume3500 m3/h
Ambient temperature g + 45C
Temperature change max 1 ,I K/min
System 8 (N/2) 2-l E.4.84
l 2 Description of the extended VDI interface
Interface control - SINUMERIK
2.1 General
At any time during program operation in the Automatic (Auto push
button) or MDI-Auto* (MDI-Auto push button) modes, the MD1 (MD1 push
button) or "Setting UP" modes can be faded in (2.5).
In block search all preparatory functions are recorded.
For switching and auxillary functions, there are 4 possible modes

of operation, depending upon machine parameters (2.6.1)
0 If theappropriate machine parameter bit has not been set, the missing
switching and auxillary functions can be manually inserted following
a search to the block required (block search indicator).
System 8 (IJI/L) 2-2 E.4.84
2.1,1 Summa= -m-m------

mm- of effect of reset s&n&s
PORESET, mains on no effect on functions in memory:

(~WER !N EESET) Zero offsets, tool offsets, subroutines,
Resetting the control machining program, additive zero
to its rBSEt stats offsets, supplementary offsets.
RESET for PllW.sF,T does not reset:

for Reset button actual data store, block number
for Rewind store,
for end of program otherwise as for PORESET
General reset.
The following are reset:
path data valid in the block
in which it is programmed,
tape reader, buffer store,
auxiliary functions, G functions,
automatic machining sequence,
execution of sub-routines
CLPROAC for end of block-single block does not reset:

for end of block MOO/M01 actual data store,
for change of operating block number store
mode to auxiliary and G
Automatic or MD1 auto functions, path
for Reset data store, buffer
store, tape reader
otherwise as for
Clear Program Active PORESET
this resets the automatic
machining sequence
System 8 (N/2) 2-3 E.4.84
2.2 Description of the interface control
2.2.1 PC interface
-w------m- control
This is an integrated PC interface control from our range of

SIMATIC S5 automated system controls, The central unit of the PC
consists of a processor and a number of memories:
- system program store for fixed programs
- system data store for flags, counters, timers, jmocess building

for the I/O periphery and other system data.
- user program store for functions programmed by the user.
- user data store for data filed by the user.
The machine is matched with the NC control with the aid of the
integral PC. This programmable controller uses the programming
language STEP 5 to link the inputs and outputs from the
machine thereby enabling the program to be adapted for various
machines. The input and output modules are part of the
SIMATIC Sg system.
The SINUMERIK and PC are interlinked by their respective
bus systems. The SINUMERIK has asynchronous access to the
PC program cycle via the PC memory (DMA- direct memory
access). No data transmit initiative is available from the PC.
Coordination of the DMA from the SINUMERIK with the other
PC interface equipment having DMA capability is provided
exclusively by the hardware of the PC bus. Thus, when the
SINUMERIK has access all other access possibilities are
inhibited.
System 8 (N/2) 2- 4 E.4.84
Data transmitted by each access is normally 1 byte with a 0

maximum of 8 bits.
The data transmission is effected in different data blocks:
4 Interface control signals
Signal transmission in blocks with a 10 ms cycle time.
Applies to all operating modes of the SINUMERIK.
b) Signals from the standard operator's panel

Signal transmission in blocks with a 50 ms cycle time.
Applies to all operating modes of the SINUMERIK.
c> Signals from the extended operator's panel (customised)

Signal transmission cycle and in blocks for all operating
modes fo the SINUMERIK. Output signals from SINUMERIK l
with 50 ms cycle time and input signals to SINUMERIK
with 100 ms cycle time.
d) PC memory data
Data transmission with SINUMERIK mode "PC system
program" (service switch), initiated by SINUMERIK
operation.
4 PC status data
Data transmission with SINUMERIK mode "Test",
initiated by SINUMERIK operation,
f> PC display data

Transmission of PC display parameters enabled by the
control signal "DISPLAY DATA FROM PC" from the
interface control signal group.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 5 E.4.84
2.2.2 PC Data
--------
Basic control 3/?3Q Basic control 2/PC 150

Inputs max. 512 lax. 1024
outputs max. 512 lax. 1024
Free markers 1024 1024

Ascribed markers (for
VDI 3422 interface) 1024 1024
Timers 1.28 128

Time period 0,Ol s to 999 s I,01 s to 9990 s
Counters 64 128
Counter .range 1 to 999 1 to 999
Function survey Binary operations

Basic operations Brackets AS PC 13OW
Timers, counters
internal load and traru
fer operations.
Comparison operations
Types of module Program modules Program modules

Function modules Step modules
Data modules Function modules
1 organisation module Data modules
Organisation modules
Supplementary operationa Add, subtract, jump, Add, subtract, jump,

shift operations, shift operations, Digital
Digital combining, combining, Indexing,
Indexing Parameter substitution
(X-parameter)
Program operations Cyclic operation, Cyclic operation,

Alarm operations Alarm operations
following switch on, Timed interrupt operations.
running from start Following switch on, running
of program from the interrupt point.
Input/Output modules 9 rack positions 8 rack positions

for input/output modules (K form). EXception BMC,
one rack position for peripheral modules in the logic
rack
Extension racks for An extension rack can bs connected when an MS760

Input/Output modules is provided.
System 8 (N/2) 2-6 E.4.84
2.3 Definition of the output and input signals
2.3.1 ,O&tg& &gals---B-m-NC 4 PC
The signals to the interface control are output via the

bus (NC-PC)
The signals from the interface control to the 8T/Sprint 8T/8N

8M/Sprint 8M/8MC are received via the bus (NC - PC)
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 7
2.4 Output signals NC ---?c PC
Ready signals to the interface control
2.4.1.1 *NC READY 1

_-----
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 8MC 8~ 8M

o/p 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: After the mains has been switched on and all
voltages have reached their correct level
"1" signal: Temperature limit 1 in the SINUMERIK has been

exceeded (warning signal) and an alarm displayed
on the operator's panel (alarm light and number)
Mains voltage
X NC! READY 1
Warning signal
K DATA INPUT ENABLE
(2.9.1)
Application note:
With the "1" signal the interface control interrupts the program
by removing the data input enable, i.e. only the block which is
being executed is completed.
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 8 E.4.84
2.4.1.2 *NC READY 2

----m- (Software Signal)
I 8T Surint 8T Sorint 8M 8MC 8N 8M

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: After the mains have been switched on and all
voltages have reached their correct level
"1" signal: a) On sensing a measuring loop error

b) On sensing a drive check error
Mains voltage
*NC READY 2
Fault alarm
Application Note:
A measuring loop or drive check error forces rapid breaking of all
drives. The drive check error alarm is cancelled with the "Reset"
push button.
After a measuring loop error you have to switch off and then re-
apply the mains. Note that then all the functions stored in the
buffer and working memories are reset.
The output signal *NC READY 2 can be used for immediate shutdown
of all NC related movements ("1"-Signal).
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 9 ~.4.84
Note:
In addition to the output interface signal *NC READY 2 (2.4.1.2) there are
NC READY 2 output signals from the measuring loop modules, MS 2OO/MS 230 01
Ms 300 (8~~1. (4.1)
NC READY 2 from the measuring loop modules is also output with a computer
check error, exceeding of temperature limit 2 or sensing of over- or under-
voltage, *NC READY 2 on the other hand not. (Software interface NC - PC),
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 10 E.4.84
2.4.2 31: -----mm-

MOTION COMMAND 0
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8M

O/Pt 4 4 8 20 68
A separate motion command is given for both directions of each

axis ( + and -) :
2.4.2.1 Operating
---- modes automatic
w--w------ - - -
"0" signal: following successful transfer of the data of* one block
into the active store: the block must contain at
least one coordinate value
"1" signal: a) when the block has been executed

b) with reset
c) for permanent axis disable (2.12.1)
3 DATA INBUT ENABLE

1
(2.94
Data transfer to working

memory
% FEED ENABLE (TOTAL)
(2.9.2)
Z MOTION COMMAND(e.g.-+-X)
Block executed
System 53(~/2) 2 - 11 E.4.84
2.4.2.2 _In _ the

_ _ setting-up
_ _ _ _ _ _mode
_ _
"0" signal: Axis selected and/or direction button pressed.

only after pressing the direction button
which-gives movement towards datum.
"1" signal: 4 with jog/handwheel when

- direction button no longer pressed and digital 0
- traversing using hadwheel
b) with step mode or retrace following block
execution and position loop (measuring circuit) 0
c) with return to datum when datum point is
reached and position loop 0
d) immediately when reset
Application note:
----w-m--
For machines with clamping this signal is used to decide which

clamp must be released.
l
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 12 E-4.84
Motion
---- command
---- signals
ase Programming or with The same motion Motion Motion command

operational case: command is command for opposite
permanently removed direction coming
applied
Subesequent GO0 for

1 block: a9 approx. 20 ms
same axis in -G60
same direction (i6-43 yes
Subsequent GO0 after working off following error

2 block: a9 in old direction from
same axis in G60 "Position-reached window"
opposite direction G&* immediately before working
off following error (also for
digital zero)
r
MOO, MO1 and after working off
stop active, following error
3 with position
single block reached
Limit switch as long as when operating

!I reached in op. operating mode mode is When
mode "Automatic" is not changed changed traversing
or "MD1 auto" off switch
using appropriate
Limit switch as long as after direction button
5 reached in direction button releasing
operating mode remains the direction
"Setting up" pressed button
during change
GO2 within one of quadrant by
5 Full circle quadrant axis, in which
GO3 the direction
of traverse
changes
EMERGENCY
7 STCP during yes with reset
axis motion
3Z When GO0 or GO9 is not programmed

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 13 E.4.84
2.4.3 H PROGRAM
m-----m ACTIVE
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ EM
O/7 1 1 1 1 1
In operating
--------------- modes automatic
"0" signal: in operating mode automatic 13) or MD1 auto a

and % NC START signal. -
"1" signal: after reset, block executed in single block, flOO/flO? program
stop, program end, change of operating mode
% NC START
(2.7.2)
% PROGRAMACTIVE
3F PROGRAMMED STOP
MOO (2.6.3)
Block executed in
single block
Z PROGRAMEND M30
(2.6.4)
"Program active"
lamp lights
Application
------w-m note:
Control of a time recorder

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 14 E.4.84
2.4.4 * REFERENCE POINT REACHED

c----------------------
8T Sprint 8T Sprint 8M 8MC 8N 8M

O/P 2 2 4 10 3 4
"0" signal: after reaching reference point and synchronising the

axis
"1" signal: before synchronising the axis
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 15 E.4.84
2.4.5 *BUFFER STORE EMPTY

-------------------
8T Sprint 8T Sprint 8MC 8MC 8N 8M

O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: buffer store empty

"I" signal: at least one buffer store is full
Application note:
There are control signals (input signals), which are registered in the
active store not directly from the PC but indirectly via the buffer store.
The following control signals belong to these:
* ADDITIVE ZERO OFFSET * R-PARAMETER WORDS1,2,3 1)

* ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION * SR REPEATS CANCEL 1)
* ZERO OFFSET GROUPS CYCLE INHIBIT
* SYNCHRONOUSTRAVERSING (only 8MC) IL
* TOOL OFFSET max. 11 part program blocks
* MIRROR IMAGE later (possibly more when CYCLE
I I
I INHIBIT is in effect)
Up to 2 part program blocks later
If these control signals which are addressed in active program, are

to be active in the next block, the block buffer store in the NC
must be cleared. When this is not the case and a control signals is
activated, it can only become effective a few blocks later (2, 11, or
more).
The buffer store can be cleared using the function@ 31 or L999 in
the program. The interface recognises this by the 0 status of the
signal *BUFFER STORE EMPTY. The control signals must be applied before
B status.
1) See signal description for details.

System 3 (N/2) 2 - 16 E.4.84
2.4.6 CONTROL ACTIVE

------- a-
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8M
o/p 1 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal: control is still processing the previous operational

instructions (control is active) The NC operators
panel disabled (Exception - Reset push button)
"0" signal: new operational instructions can be accepted
(control is not active)
@@ication
-----mm note:
With SINUMERIK systems having a flexible operator panel a

(all input operator elements are available to the .PC) the signal
CONTROL ACTIVE is required in order to be able to control the
input from the interface. The PC has access to the display.
The signal appears, e.g. when large operations are being executed
in the bubble memory or program search is active or reader
reading 01: when punching tape.
a -
l
System 8 (N/2) 2- 17
E.4.84
2.5 Output signals NC +PC
Operating mode signals to the interface control
2.5.1 Setting 3
---
a) K JOG/HANDWHEEL(JOG Push button)
I 8~ Scrint 8~ Sprint 8~ 8~c 8N 8~

O/PI 1 1
"0" signal: operating mode jog/handwheel
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected e.g. automatic
Jog/handwheel l-l
1
I
' e.g. automatic [g] I
I l-l
II I
Z JOG/HANDWHEEL i--
b) z INCREMENTAL STEP (INCR Push button)
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8~

o/p 1 1 1. 1 1 1
'lOvv signal: operating mode incremental step selected
11111signal: some other operating mode selected e.g. automatic +

El
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 18 E.4.84
C) * RETRACE (REPOS Push button)
I 8-r Sorint 8T Sorint 8M 8MC 8N 8M

o/p 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: operating mode retrace cl7 selected

"I" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g., automatic 03
d) * ZERO RETURN (REF Push button)
I 8T Sprint 8T Sprint 8M 8MC 8N 8M

o/p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: operating mode return to datum jc( selected

"I" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g., automatic l-l3
e) * SET ACTUAL DATA STORE (PRESET Push button)

O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
'0" signal: operating mode set actual data store cl&- selected
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g., automatic
q
3
System 6 (N/2) 2 - 19 E.4.84
2.5.2 Z -----
Automatic (Auto button)
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8M ~MC 8N 8~

O/P 1 1 1 1 : 1
"0" signal: operating mode automatic 131 selected
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g. incremental step --+I
El
2.53 3t --m-s
MD1 AUTO (MD1 Auto button)
o,p / 8; Sprint YT W-in; M 8yc 8: 8:
"0" signal: operating mode MD1 AUTO B selected
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g. incremental step "z
I -. 1
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 20 33.4.84
2.5.4 Z -------
SINGLE BLOCK
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ .8M

O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
rrO1lsignal: a) operating mode automatic El) and single block
(switch) a active
b) operating mode MD1 auto /-3] and single block
(switch) [g] active
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g. incremental step --H
cl
2.5.5 K ---------
MANUAL DATA INPUT
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8M 8~c 8~ 8~

O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
' llOfl signal: operating mode manual data inputPJ selected

01 .-
"1" signal: some other operating mode se1ected;e.g. incremental step 4
0
2.56 % ---s-m-
DATA TRANSFER
o,p / 8'; Sprin: 8~ Sprin: 8~ 8:~ 8: 8:
-
"0" signal: operating mode data transfer ++ selected
ISI
"1" signal: some other operating mode selected, e.g. incremental step
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 21 ~.4.84
2.6 Output signals NC 4 PC

Program commands to the interface control
2.6.1 General
----
2.6.1.1 Time controlled
------------------- outpt --------------
of auxiliary functions
----------
The auxiliary functions S, T, H and the first M function are out-
put simultaneously (via separate channels). At the end of a
delay time the associated mod. signals S, T, H and M follow.
Where several M functions are programmed in one block they are
output consecutively.
The delay time and mod. signals can be adjusted between 10 and
160 ms in steps of 10 ms (common times for all switching and
auxiliary functions).
The transfer of the switching and auxiliary functions into the

interface control is effected by the trailing edge of the mod.
signals.
Depending on the machine parameters the switching and auxiliary

functions can be outputted
- before the beginning of axis traverse
- at the beginning of axis traverse
Word S,T,H,M
Delay signal
ZE S,T,H,M mod. signal

-P tv+t, I--
tv and tA can be adjusted in steps of 10 ms between
10 ms and 160 ms
for a PC . tv and tAz 1,2. (max PC cycle time)
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 22 E.4.84
Four types of output can be selected using machine parameter:
a) during search the auxiliary functions are not stored and

not output;
b) during block search as each switching and auxiliary function is

read in it is immediately output with a modulation signal;
c) during block search the NC stores the last switching and

auxiliary function of each address:
following IK start the stored switching and auxiliary
functions are then output by mod. signal.
Three separate stores are available for the M addresses
d) during block search the NC stores the last switching and

auxiliary function of each address; at the end of block
search, the stored switching and auxiliary functions are
then output by mod. signal (Prior to NC start),
Three separate stores are available for the M addresses.
If the appropriate machine data bit has not been set, the
auxiliary functions can be stored manually (manual data
input) after the pre-selected block is reached (search
indicator).
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 23 E.4.84
2.6.1.2 Handshake controlled output of auxiliary functions
When operating in this mode, (designation by machine

data N427, Bit 7) the output of auxiliary functions
M, S, T, and H, as well as the signals M02/M30
and BLOCK CHANGEDELAY (8N) is acknowledged by
the PC. (Handshake principle).
Contrary to the time controlled principle, no delay time is
needed. The auxiliary functions and their mod. signals
are output directly (10 ms clock intervall).
Upon reception of these signals, the PC has to reset the
NC mod. signal by acknowledgement. Following a delay
of less than IO ms, the NC will respond to this
acknowledgement and proceed to output the next function,
provided that there is more than one auxiliary function
in the current block.
The advantage of this handshake principle between NC and PC
is the time optimized output and processing of
auxiliary functions.
PC acknowledgement
(issued by function
module FB12:-B-3)
* Block change delay (8N)
* M02/M30 or
* M,-S-T-H med./signal
-2 - 24 -
System 0 (N/2) 2 - 24 E.4.84
2.6.2 Miscellaneous
-------e-w functions_ M, ( time- or handshake controlled)

9 9 9
Signal output: 2 decade, BCD coded with mod. signal M

Sequence: a) M word ( 2 decades simultaneously)
b) Z M MOD. SIGNAL
13-- ,,,ifi a_uLo- 13

I,in--------
automatic FI- o
-w- 1
The first M word appears after data transfer of the M word into
the active store. The second M word appears at the end of the
mod. signal for the first M word. Likewise, the third M word
appears at the end of the mod. signal for the second M word.
The last M word is held until data transfer of a new block

with M functions into the active store.
M functions are cancelled a) on reset
b) at end of program
c) overwritten by another M function
Example:
a) Output of 2 consecutive M functions in one block (time controlled)
Delay time
% M MOD SIGNAL
(2.6.1)
-2 - 24a-
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 25 E.4.84
b) Output of two consecutive M functions in one block (handshake controlled)
// 42
, / 29 I /
M Word
- t& f--
-
*M MOD. SIGNAL
PC-acknowledgement
(FB 12-B-3)
t less than 10 ms
'e
The response time to the acknowledgment signal in the NC is less than

IC
The output of the 2nd M-function follows undelayed.
The M commands (MOO, MOI, M02, M17'), M19') , M30, M36, M37),active in the
control are also output along with mod. signal, in the BCD output.
l 1) Dependent on machine parameter

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 26 E.4.84
l
Manual
--------- input--------------------------------------------
of M functions in the feed hold condition
(in,-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,~,,,,,,,,,,,,,-,,,,
automatic in MD1 auto in all setting-q -- mm----
2-------------- modes) (2.5.1)
The input M word appears after pressing the input button +$

cl
and available *DATA INPUT ENABLE (active condition z 0)
The interface must enable the M word transfer to the machine after NC
start has been pressed.
The following M functions are internal to the control and have no effect
in the PC: MOO, MOI, M02, M17'), M19", M30, M36, M37. 0
*DATA INPUT ENABLE

(2.9.1)
Input button
M word
Delay time
h
*M MOD. SIGNAL
time controlled 0
(2.6.2)
"M MOD, SIGNAL
PC acknowledaement
(FB 12: -B-3)
handshake controlled
1) dependent on machine parameter

SYC tern 8 (Nk2) 2 - 27 E.4.84
2.6.3 K PROGRAMMED
STOP MOO/M01
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 81-1 .

o/p 1 1 1 1 1 1
(cornmop signals for both commands)
"0" signal: block executed and auxiliary function outputted and

a) MOO in active store
b) I@1 in active store and conditional stop switch
(3 active
"1" signal: a) with Z NC START

b) with reset
c) with mode change
Data transfer into the

active store
Block executed
Content of the active store
M word
fE M MOD SIGNAL
X PROGRAMMED
STOP
MOO/MO1
'-5 32 NC START
\ (2.7.2)
i
Interface
\ operation:
-i,Stop the spindle
.' \
a - Dit'qerentiate between a program interrupt for single
block"vxxl MOO/M01
- Cencelk,~OGRAM ACTIVE' signal (2.4.3)

\
I
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 28 E.4.84
2.6.4 * _P,ROGRAM
_ENE!!02/M30
- - (time- or handshake controlled)
O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
'0" signal: a) block executed and auxiliary functions output and

- MO2 in the active store or
- M30 in the active store (only automatic, MDI, auto)
b) pressing the reset button (all modes)
c) pressing the button for rewind to main block (automatic, 8MC)
d) pressing the button for rewind to start of program (automatic)
e) switch on SINUMERIK (all modes)
"1" signal: after IO to 160 ms (machine parameter)
Data transfer into

the active store
Block executed
Content of acitve f ;
,//A MO2 LF
store I
I I
I
+ I
/
M word n
II
02
\-..
\I
"M MOD.SIGNAL t
1 I
(2.6.1) I I
I 2i;
I 0
z!
WY
* PROGRAMEND ;
M02/M30 -&- 10 to 160 ms
tA1
time controlled
tAl IO to 160 ms
*M MOD.SIGNAL
PC acknowledgement
(FB 12: -B-3)
*PROGRAMEND *-I f-- ,,,/I

M02/M30
/
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 29 E.4.84
Application note:
e.g. clearing function stores, i.e. cancelling functions stored

in the interface control.
This cannot be used for automatic sequencing in the interface
such as barfeed, counting components, opening protective
(interlock) devices. For these functions the interface must
utiliee the BCD code M functions of section 2.6.2.
1f the last block is in a sub-routine, program stop is effective on

completion of the block. During block search, the signal is output
when the search is ended by a programmed M02/M30.
-
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 30 E.4.84
2.6.5 -Spindle
--w---- speed S (time- or handshake
------------------------------------ controlled)
I 81 Sprint 8T Sprint 8M 8MC 8N 8M

O/P 17 17 17 17 17 17
I
Signal output: 4 decades, BCD coded with mod. signal S

Sequence: a) S word (4 decades simultaneously)
b) * S MOD. SIGNAL
2.6.5.1 S function
----------- programmed in machining - program
-- ------------------ -- mm-
{with automatic 171 +

----------------,-,),,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, with MD1 auto 171
' 1
The S function appears after data transfer of an-S word into the active
store. The iast S word is held until the data transfer of a new block with
S functi;on into the active store.
An S functi:on is cancelled a) on reset
6) emergency stop
d) on sensing a measuring loop error
Example: output of an S function
(time controlled)
Data transfer into the ----- I

I
I
active store I
--+----
Block executed / 1c
x lOOOS29LF.
time 'controlled
I
*S MOD. SIGNAL' I
(2.6.5)
*S MOD. SIGNAL
n
II
PC acknowled ement handshake controlled
(FB 12: -B-3 B
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 31 E.4.84
2.6.5.2 Manual input----------------------------------------

-------_- of an S function in the feed hold condition
--mm--
with automatic
------------------ z ------------------
with MD1 auto A------
with Joglhandwheel
- ---------
The S function appears after data transfer of an S word into the active store.
The last S word is held until the data transfer of a new block with S function
into the active store.
An S function is cancelled a) on reset

c) with emergency stop
d) on sensing measuring loop error
* DATA INPUT ENABLE YL,-

(2.9.1) ,
I
* INPUT
S word time controlled
Delay time I
* S MOD. SIGNAL + -
(2.6.5)
* S MOD. SIGNAL
PC acknowledgement
(FB 12: -B-3)
1. A programmed S word in conjuction with M19, 692, and 696 is not the same
as a spindle speed value.
Function User program
M19: oriented spindle stop e.g. N5 . . . Ml9 S... LF

692 : speed command value limit e.g. N5 . . . G92 S... LF
626: speed actual value monitoring e.g. N5 . . . 626 S... LF
2. These S words are JQ& available to the PC

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 32 E.4.84
&plication
---------I----- notes:
The entered S word is available after pressing the input push button,
if *DATA INPUT ENABLE is active.
The interface must enable a function transfer to the machine after
the NC start had been pressed.
2.6.6 *BLOCK CHANGE DELAY (only

--------------- 8N)r (time or handshake controlled)

O/P - - 1 -
"0" signal: Only when

- all the axes have finished positioning
- all miscellaneous functions have been output
- REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGE DELAY is active ("I"-Signal)
"I" signal: After 10 mms - 160 mms (machine parameter tAl = time for M02/M30)
a) Time controlled
---------------
Data transfer to
working memory
Position reached
I I
$1
I \
Block in working
N!,.X..Y..LF 1 N.;X..Y..LF N..X..Y
memory t I
Delay S, T, M
*MOD. SIGNAL
S, T, M (2.6.1)
REQUEST FOR BLOCK

CHAIWE DELAY (2.9.13b)
* BLOCK CHANGE DELAY
* DATA INPUT ENABLE

(2.9.1)
2 time for M02/M30 signals

tAl
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 33 E.4.84
b) Handshake
-------"------------controlled
l-l l-l n
Data transfer to \1 1\
working memory \I
Position reached l-l ,I l-l
II I II
1 I
Block in the working N.;.X..Y..LF
I
' N.;X..Y..LF N..X..Y
memory
PC acknowledgement
(FB: -B-3)
*MOD. SIGNALS S, T, M
(2.6.1)
REQUEST FOR BLOCK
CHANGEDELAY (2.9.14)
*BLOCK CHANGEDEiAY
*DATA INPUT ENABLE

(2.9.1)
&plication
--------------- notes:
When M22 and M24 (Nibble) are active, REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGE
DELAY (2.9.13b) is not active. -NO *BLOCK DELAY is output.
In a single block *BLOCK CHANGEDELAY is not output "at the end of

the block", but at the following NC start.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 34 E.4.84
2.6.7 Tool number T (Time-or handshake controlled)
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8M

O/P I 9 17 25 9 17
Signal output: ST/Sprint BT: least significant 2 decades,BNg least &lnifhant

two decades.
Sprint EM: least significant 4 decades, 8M/8MC: least
significant 2 decades, BCD coded with the MOD signal T
Sequence: a) TWORD (all decades simultaneously)

b) T MOD SIGNAL
Data flow and time sequence as for spindle speed S (2.6.5).
Tool
------ change
If the T word is programmed in its own block, it is necessary to

halt program execution by removing the data input enable (2.9.1);
if the block also includes path data, the program must be
interrupted by removal of the feed enable (2.9.2). (This applies
only for output before axis movement).
Where the functional sequence in the interface control is to be

independent of the T word, both data input enable and feed
enable must be removed for the period of the tool change.
Removal must start during the Z T MOD. SIGNAL and remain until
the end of the tool change.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 35 E.4.84
e 2.6.8 Auxiliary
_----em---- function H (Time or handshake controlled)

O/P 2= 25 25 25 - 25
Signal output: 6 decades, BCD coded with mod. signal H

Sequence: a) H word (6 decades simultaneously)
b) % H MODSIGNAL
Data flow and time sequence as for spindle speed S (2.6.5)
l
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 36 E.4.84
2.6.9 Preparatory
-m--m------- functions G

O/P '1 1 1 1 - 1
2.6.9.1 a) % THREADCUTTING G 33/G63
In operating
----m-m--- mode automatic
,,---&,----,,-- , MD1 auto
"0" signal: after data transfer of a block in which G33 or G63

was programmed
"1" signal: a) after data transfer of a block in which another

G function from the 1 st or 10 th G group was
programmed.
b) on reset
Data transfer into the n--.-n

active store'
+ 4
Content of the e.g. .G 01 G 33 ... e.g. G 00
active store
5 THREADCUTTING G33/G63
I r
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 37 E.4.84
l Effect in the SINUMEZIK:
The following are inactive:
with G33: a) feedrate override switch

b) feed hold ("total feed enable" & used,
"feed hold for each axis" is used)
c) single block (stop at end of next block
without G33 or ~63)
d) depending on machine data N463/7 "S-Override
effectiv with G33", or else override tied at
100%.
e) depending on machine data N466/1 "Multiple thread",
and S-Override variable, so threading is possible
with preselected override position, e.g. 10, 20,
50%.
with G63: feedrate override switch
Application note:
With G33 feed hold (3.3) can be indirectly achieved via spindle
stop (3.2) being generated as a logic link between thread cutting
and feed hold. With ~63 the spindle must be stopped parallel with
l feed hold.
System 8 (iU/2) 2 - 38 E.4.84
2.6.3.2 *RAPID
- - a -TRAVERSE
- -.-,,- GO0
- -

o/J? 1 1 1 1 1 1
Zn operating mode automatic, ND1 auto
"0" signal: after data transfer of a block containing GO0

into the active store.
"1" signal: a) afte? execution of the block

b) on reset
Data transfer into

the active store
Block executed
Content of active
store e.g. G 01 G 00 e-g, G 02
I
i
\
f RAPID TRAVERSE GO0

I
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 39 E.4.84
2.6.40 ACTIVE PROGRAM NUMBER

O/P 16 16 16 16 16 16
The actual program number is output in 4 decades of BCD,

ca 100 ms after data transfer of the first main program
block to the working memory, and remains until M02/M30

is read or a Reset is initiaterd.
*NC START
(2.7.2)
Data transfer into

the working memory
(see 2.9.1)
I
+ 1st main program block
Contents of active store
N 1 ... LF
4 ca. 100 ms
ACTIVE PROGRAM NUMBER
*END OF PROGRAM
M02/M30 (2.6.4)
Encoded output signals :
[8000~4000~2000~1000 800~400~200~100 80140120110 8 I4 I2 I1 1

4th DEC 103 3rd DEC 102 2nd EC 101 1st DEC 100
The maximum output, program number is 9999
EXAMPLE
: $2469
0010010001 101001
System El (N/2) 2 - 40 E.4.84
2.6.11 ACTIVE SUB-ROUTINE NUMBER

a

O/P I2 12 12 12 12 12
The actual sub-routine number is output in 3 decades of EICD, ca IOOms

after data transfer of the first sub-routine block to the working memory,
and remains until Ml7 is read or a reset is initiated (see Data input
enable 2.9.1)
r-l
Data transfer into the
working memory I
(see 2.9.1)
i &t SR block
Contents of active store c
. . . . LF
Active SR number
Ml7 or reset -w I ca.lOOms t

I
Encoded output signals
800~400j200~100 80~40~20~10 8 I4 I2 II
3 rd DEC 102 2nd DEC 101 1st DEC 100
Max value 999
EXAMPLE : L 158
0 0 0 1O)l)O 1 1010 0
l
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 41 E.4.84
2.6.12 Output signals for control of the spindle NC+PC

Block diagram NC-PC
NC PC
r ---3t2.6.12) Actual Spindle Rotation clock \

---a(2.6.13) 1wise. Spindle Speed Limit
L --*(2.6.14) ' Spindle position reached
--+(2.6.15) ;t Spindle at commanded speed
t
(2.6.5) S word/X MOD signal
(2.6.2) M word/X MOD signal
- WSDindlef, . 11 (02) /
. (2.6.17)
k Spindle 2nd ramp value C2.10.1)

i ,k Spindle oscillate :2.10.21
Spindle commanded rotation :2.10.3)
Clockwise. Spindle stop :2.10.4)
9~ Coding for gear stages :2.10.5)
S Command Speed (2.11.3.6)
L I
l 1 Analoo, speed command vay+

Information
Signals
Enable sigr
Control
Fkp Commands
Actual
Speed
Actual
motor
position
1 gearbox k
Pulse encoder
with marker
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 42 E.4.84
Description:
In SINUMERIK 8, the task of controlling the spindle speed

as required, is managed jointly by NC and PC. While the PC
accomodates the gear change logic and spindle speed command
via external data input, the NC is providing the analop
voltage command for the spindle-controller.
In the NC, two acceleration ramp values are provided for
each gear and, when enabled by an interface signal, increases
the acceleration time constant for large inertias or when
brakinc by reducing the moment of inertia.
Spindle oscillation can be activated in the NC by the PC.
Oriented spindle stop (M19), may be carried out entirely
by the NC, depending upon a machine parameter.
The spindle is positioned in either direction in each of
the gear ranges.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 43 E.4.84
2.6.12.1 Oriented Spindle Stop Ml9 (01),(02)
The interface as described below, offers improved ways to

handle gear shift and related operations, as well as spindle
orientation without additional hardware.
The spindle encoder serves as feedback of spindle speed

and spindle position, the zero pulse providing a position
reference signal.
During normal operation, the spindle is operated speed

controlled, only during M19, the spindle drive system
becomes position controlled. A spindle encoder with 1024
pulses/rev. is required for speed and position, feedback. A
resolution of l/II degree, (360'/4096 pulses) is achieved by
pulse multiplier (internal hardware, factor 4). Spindle en-
coder geared I:2 deliver half this resolution.
Spindle orientation is activated by tape command "Ml9".
Definition of the required spindle position is done by
setting datum, stored either by manual input or tape
command "Ml9 S... ' in degree. Positioning is possible in
either direction and from standstill.
Spindle orientation can also be accomplished by means of

0 external hardware. In this case, Ml9 is handled like
any other miscellaneous function.
When using the NC-internal solution (machine data N436/
Bit 6), two versions (version A and B) are possible in
regard to the part program sequence.
Version
---------- A:
Spindle orientation is han6led by a separate oart orouram
block, block change release depending upon completion
of the function M19, simultaneous axes movement is not
possible.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 44 E.4.84
Version
----- B:
Here, Ml9 is self-retaining for several blocks. While the
spindle is positioning itself or held in position control
looPt the axes can be moved simultaneously, or if sensible,
a tool change can be executed.
To both
--------- versions applies:
a--
- Ml9 must be programmed in a separate block, with no
axis command allowed.
- Spindle orientation is performed in the programmed
direction (M03/M04).
- Ml9 can be executed from standstill
- Spindle orientation is started with begin of block
execution
- Ml9 is interrupted and cancelled by:
EMERGENCY STOP
RESET
End of program (M02/M30)
SINDLE STOP
Measuring system alarm (spindle or axes)
any alarm that stops axes movements
- With "MD1 auto" Ml9 may be selected: with "Jog" or
"Automatic" however, it must not be overstored.
- Ml9 is output as an auxiliary function at the PC interface
Special Features
----a----------- with Version A:
l
- block change (continuation of program) is held up
until the Ml9 function is executed (see also SPINDLE STOP).
- Simultaneous positioning of axes is not possible
- Operation mode cannot be changed while Ml9 is activated.
Special Features
----------a----- with Version B:
- Ml9 is self-retaining, even via several blocks
- Spindle orientation is completed with SPINDLE STOP,
unsynchronised to the part program.
- Block change (continuation of program) is released
following delay time and duration of mod. signal,
when time controlled output is used, or after PC-
acknowledgement of Ml9 output when operating by
handshake principle.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 45 E.4.84
In part program blocks following Ml9 axes movements or

even a tool change can be performed, while the spindle
is positioning or held in closed loop control.
The operation mode during Ml9 execution can be changed
to Jog/Step mode or Repositioning, while maintaining the
spindle position loop. Axes can be moved also.
Upon recognition of M19, the PC can inhibit a part program
block change by withholding READ ENABLE signal.
In case Ml9 is called up again before a previous Ml9
command has been completed with SPINDLE STOP, the spindle
will be positioned to the new endposition, moving the
shortest possible way regardless of previous active
directions. Spindle movement is less than 180' independent
of ACC/DEC-ramp
During Ml9 operation, the spindle direction (MO~/MU~)
may not be reversed, otherwise orientation is done in
undefined direction. (cw or ccw)
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 46 E.4.84
.
0
With NC-internal solution, spindle orientation is performed
in the following sequence:
- Controlled deceleration of the spindle to cut off speed
via Acc./Dec.-ramp (1).
- Continuation in the same direction with cut-off
speed (2).
- At the conjunction (3) of gain ramp (5) and the cut
off speed activation of position control and moving into
spindle stop position (4) (Movement less than 1 l/2
revolutions).
- Maintaining the position by position control
- Output of signal *SPINDLE IN POSITION to the PC
- As the PC responds with SPINDLE STOP, the NC takes off l
the position control, outputs zero-command (spindle
command-voltage contact opens ) and disables the spindle
drive by cancelling (*CONTROLLER ENABLE).
Spindle
Speed
Command
creep
Speed
-360' -270' -180' O0

Spindle posi ,tion
too)
,
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 47 E.4.84
If the amplification is small, such that the creep inter-

section point (3) on the deceleration ramp line is more than
150' from the commanded position, the drawing below applies.
Note that up to 180' before the spindle stop position, the
creep speed is effective, there follows a jump (6) and
subsequently the spindle reduces speed down a linear
slope to the spindle O-position.
Spindle
Speed
-360' -270' OC
(0) Spindle position
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 48 E.4.84
Data transfer into

working storage 1
ABlock change Sequence B I
Block in I
working storage I
I
Ml9 storage } 19 I
1\\ 1
I:
Cut off speed-- ---
Spindle position A
tolerance
Position control on
I
*SPINDLE IN POSITION
I1 !
SPINDLE STOF :
I ::
I-; z
It,1 i?
m
Signal sequence with oriented spindle stop

System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 49
a
SPINDLE STOP with Ml9
In conjunotion with M19, the signal SPINDLE STOP from PC holds another
important function:
It not only stops the spindle like it does when the spindle is speed
controlled, it also concludes the Ml9 function.
During spindle orientation, the NC signals to the PC *SPINDLE IN
POSITION. If the PC responds with SPINDLE STOP, the NC concludes
the Ml9 function, opens the position control loop and outputs
*CONTROLLER DISABLE.
SPINDLE STOP is to be generated by the PC not until the transient

a response of the spindle drive is over. In case of strong overshooting
it is recommended to delay the SPINDLE STOP signal for a certain
time tdeiay , following the signal *SPINDLE IN POSITION (see also
section '2.6.15).
Ml9 from Standstill
If at block begin an Ml9 command is read and SPINDLE STOP is output

by the PC, the latter is not immediately interpreted as a finish
report for the Ml9 function, but the block change delayed for the
duration of delay time and mod. signal output when time controlled
or until acknowledgement is received in case of handshake control.
Thus the PC is able to reognize the miscellaneous command output
Ml9 from the NC, cancel the SPINDLE STOP signal and initiate the
spindle orientation from standstill. The spindle must be enabled
by the PC while the M-MOD. signal is still output by the NC (or
before the handshake signal is generated). If the spindle is not
enabled in time, the Ml9 is interpreted as a regular M-output.
The spindle is positioned according to the active direction
command (interface signal cw) and the preset feed rate.
a
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 50 E.4.84
With Software 02 the function "Spindle orientation" (M 19)

has been modified as follows:
M 19 out of standstill
Independantly from a programmed spindle direction, (cw or ccw),
the spindle is positioned the shortest way possible.
-Positioning accuracy
Programmed spindle position in O,l" increments with decimal
point, positioning within 0,s' accuracy.
M 19 and RESET
Commonly, the function M 19 is interrupted by RESET or M02/M30,
and the spindle halted. Now this can be altered by machine data.
With machine data "M 19 and RESET" set activ, spindle orientation
is continued, regardless of M02/M30 or RESET until concluded by
PC via "SPINDLE STOP" signal or interrupted by "EMERGENCY STOP".
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 51 E.4.84
Soecial features of the interface for v = constant:
For v = constant, control of the spindle is executed by the NC only

(taking into account the actual diameter), although it does in this
case also take the S command value (2.11.3 f) from the PC + NC
interface. In the case of v = constant, the value is not inter-
preted as a rotational speed but as a cutting speed. As before
the PC selects the gear stage. Thus, if during v = constant, a
gear switch is required, this is initiated from the PC.
With the S command value (2.11.3 f) of 0 the speed control reduces
the motor speed to 0 even with v = constant. The gear change is
effected during spindle oscillation. A new S value is given and
the appropriate cutting speed effected. A change of gear is not
normally made during machining.
Note : Although v = constant is activated internally in the NC,

it is suppressed during oscillationand the S speed
command value (2.11.3 f) is not interrogated. If,
during v = constant, the automatic mode is interrupted
by setting up, the S speed command value continues to
be interpreted as cutting speed.
System 8(N/2) 2 - 52 E.4.84
Special features for EMEXENCY STOP and mains switch on:
As for normal stop the speed is reduced in accordance with a

preset characteristic also in the event of an E. STOP.
After the motor speed has reached 0, the speed command
value contact is opened and 0 V output via the hardware,
(J3? some other characteristic is required, e.g. deceleration
without characteristic or deceleration using armature short-
circuit, this must be realised using appropriate external circuitry).
The PC speed command is cancelled with EM stop.
The interface signal VELOCITY CONTROLUR READY (5.1.1) is
also important for S analog. As long as this signal is not
available when the mains supply is connected, the S analog
output is not activated. T.he NC only closes
tha speed command value contact end removes 3XlNTROLLER INHIBIT
when *OSCILLATE, Ml9 or an:ekternal
. . spindle command value is
requested ,
If *VELOCITY CONTROLLER READY is lost during normal operaticn,

the NC reacts as if it were E Stop.
System 8 (;d/2) 2 - 53 E.4.84
2.6.12.2 Ramp characteristics

___--w-w--- (Main S,oindle Drive)
5) --
o--6!: c n
t
Variable speed main spindle drive

(e.g. D.C. motor with electro-magnetic clutch)
A number of gear stages are used to realise the complete

spindle speed range.
w--w- Normally with milling machines the gear stage is

derived directly from the programmed S word
(there is no switch over using M functions), In
this case there is no area of overlap (see diagram),
-----a-*- Normally with lathes gear switching is effected

by an M function. In this case the individual
spindle speed ranges overlap,
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 54 E.4.84
1) Voltage level IO V corresponds to maximum motor speed

(this value is stored permanently in the NC)
2) Maximum speeds for the spindle corresponding to the gear stage

and the 10 V for max. motor speed (values as NC machine parameter
16 = 9999 RPM or I,6 = 999 RPM)
3) Ramp time for spindle motor from no to nmax is taken into account
for each speed change; also for immediate siop and V = const.
(2 values/gear range. Time settable 0 - 2 min for O+ nmax.)
4) Creep is introduced for M19, prior to switching in loop control.
Motor speed for spindle oxcillate around zero (for gear

5, motor
engagement; value as NC machine parameter). The oscillation speed
is not limited to the minimum motor speed.
6) Minimum motor speed for stable operation. Normally the motor will not
be allowed to run below this speed; exception is Ml9 (Value as NC machine
parameter). The oscillation speed is not limited in this case.
7) Maximum chuck or workpiece-dependent spindle speed; motor will not be

allowed to exceed this value; command value is limited and/or altered with
G26S... by the operator or from punched tape.
If in spite of the command, the actual spindle speed exceeds the limit
value an alarm is transferred to the PC.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 55 E.4.84
8) Maximum spindle speed for V constant. The values stored in the NC

under G92 S... can be changed by the operator or from punched
tape. With V constant active and G92 S... and G26 S... both active, the
smaller of these two limits takes precedence. If in spite of the command
limit, the actual spindle speed exceeds the limit, an alarm is transferred
to the PC.
9) Command-actual value comparison of spindle speed (this comparison is

referred to the spindle and functions within 'a tolerance window). The
tolerance is set by NC machine parameter. Exception is when oscillating
the spindle.
Remarks:
The maximum spindle speeds are:
BT 5000 RPM
8M 3750 RPM
OMC (65 axes) 6000 RPM
f3MC ( 7 5 axes) 3000 RPM
with MS230 with ST/EM 9999 RPM
with MS250 with 8T/8M 9999 RPM

with MS301 with 8MC 9999 RPM
These values can be multiplied by 2 (spindle actual value X2) or reduced

in the ratio of 2:l where a reduciton qearbox is fitted to the encoder.
The maximum value is 9999 RPM. The smallest speed from 2) is 16 RPM.
Where the S value is from 0,l - 999 RPM (machine parameter 436,3)
taken from 2) it then becomes I,6 RPM - 999.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 56
E.4.84
2.6.12.3 Additional
------------ S@.ndle monitoring
---------------- (02) I
In addition to monitoring the spindle by PC using interface sig-

nals provided, it is now possible to effectively monitor the spin-
dle independantly from a PC-program The spindle
l can now be stopped
by the NC itself, following an alarm situation, provided the NC-soft-
ware is of edition 02 or later and analog spindle command output is
in effect.
set speed tolerance
(commanded speed)
standstill tolerance
The additional-spindle-monitorinq_aEElies for the

--------------------- following three
--a---
_spindle criterias:
----------I----
a) Spindle at standstill, PC-signal: * SPINDLE AT STANDSTILL

Zero speed tolerance is defined by machine datum (N291). l
Input range: 0.01 - 1.25% of the maximum speed for each gear
range
Input increments: 0.01%
b) Spindle within commanded speed range;
PC-signal: * SPINDLE AT COMMANDED SPEED
The set speed or commanded speed is the programmed, or with con-
stant cutting speed calculated spindle speed. It may additionally
be manipulated by a spindle override switch, The set speed tolerance
is defined by machine datum (N358).
Input range: 1 - 99% of the "set speed"
Input increments: 1%
For low spindle speeds, this "set speed tolerance" is increased 0
to the amount of "standstill tolerance".
E.4.84
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 57
c) Spindle speed maximum: "SPINDLE SPEED LIMIT"

The maximum spindle speed is limited by either
- G26 setting
- maximum gear range speed
- or, with constant cutting speed, preferably by G92 S..
per program
The maximum spindle speed tolerance is fixed by machine datum

(N290) .
Input range: 1 - 99% of maximum speed
Input increments: 1%
With 100% preset, the monitoring is turned off. When exceeding
the monitoring limit, the spindle is stopped by the NC (S-analog
to PI), the alarm 225 is displayed, and the corresponding PC-signal
output. Axis movement is also stopped simultaneously.
Only after "RESET" may the operation be resumed.
The additional spindle monitoring as described, has to be activa-
ted by machine datum. If not set, the "normal" spindle monitoring
is active:
- there is no standstill check

- the maximum speed tolerance and the set speed tolerance
are fixed by machine datum (N358) in absolute Rev/Min
- with maximum speed exceeded, axis and spindle stop is
initiated by the PC (PC-User program)
Interface signals of importance for spindle control and monito-

ring are described in the following pages.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 58 E.4.84
2.6.13 CLOCKWISE
ACTUAL SPINDLE ROTATION-m-m-
---mm-------
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 8~c 8N 8M

O/P 1 1 1 1 1-I
This signal is derived from the direction of the pulse generator.
"1" signal : actual rotation clockwise

"0" signal: actual rotation anti-clockwise
2.6.14 SPINDLE SPEED LIMIT

-m-m------
Sprint-- 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8M

l 8T,
O/PI 1
"1" signal: the actual spindle speed has exceeded the tolerance
"window"
"0" signal: the actual spindle speed is within the tolerance "window",
The control will not permit speeds above the limit (G92 S...,
~26 S...). Nevertheless the actual spindle speed is continuously
monitored so that in the event of a fault the signal SPINDLE
SPEED LIMIT can be set. The fault window is determined by machine
parameter (N 358) as an absolute speed value.
Spindle Speed
Maximal Speed
Tolerance "Window"
Spindle Speed Limit
RESET
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 59 E.4.84
l
2.6.1.5 *SPINDLE
----- INa----
POSITION

O/P 1 1 1 1 - 1
"0" signal: for spindle in position

"I" signal: a) for spindle not in position
b) for spindle stop
The *SPINDLE IN POSITION Signal is only output when Ml9 is active and the
actual position is within the tolerance band (machine parameter). An
overshoot (outside the tolerance band) causes the *SPINDLE IN POSITION
l signal to be lost. This condition can be as a result of poor spindle
controller commissioning or speed regulated with a small tolerance band.
The PC outputs SPINDLE STOP after the overshooting has stopped.
Signal sequence and operation see under: "Spindle orientation

(M 19)"
l
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 60 E.4.84
2.6.16 *SPINDLE
---_--- Al' SPEED
--

O/P I 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: actual spindle speed is in tolerance window

"1" signal: actual spindle speed is outside tolerance window
Application note:
Once the NC has ramped the motor to the commanded speed
(taking into account the selected gear stage), the PC receives
the signal (actual spindle speed in tolerance range) that
the drive (with reference to the spindle) has reached the
new speed. The tolerance window is an absolute apfind value
defined in machine parameter N 358.
For spindle oscillation (2.10.2) the "1" signal is always active.
2.6.17 * ----------------------
SPINDLE AT STANDSTILL 102)
w-m
8T Sprint 8T 8~ Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N

0 1 1 1 1 1 1
"I"-signal: Spindle speed above standstill-tolerance a
pl- signal: Spindle speed within spindle standstill-tolerance
Spindle standstill-monitoring is activated by machine datum for
"additional spindle monitoring".
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 61 E.4.84
2.7 Input signals PC - NC
Ready signals to the SINUMERIK
2.7.1 EMERGENCY
-------- STOP

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal: E. STOP condition; one of the E. STOP buttons pressed

"0" signal: operating condition; n o E. STOP buttons actuated
Application note:
A "1" signal effects rapid braking of the feed drives using
maximum braking current (2.9.7 c). Once the E.STOP condition
has been cleared by the reset button, it is necessary to re-
synchronise the axes (return to datum). The program data must
be read in again.
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 62 E.4.84
2.7.2 * NC
-----START

I/p ' 1 1 1 ' 1
"0" signal: the start button (3.6) cl@ on the control or a start
button on the machine has been actuated and the
starting prerequisites are satisfied in the interface
control.
"1" signal: no start button has been pressed
Starting prerequisites
satisfied in the interface control
START (3.6)
3 NC START
Display "Program active"

(2.4.3)
Effect in the SINUMEZIK:
In operating mode automatic El , MD1 auto

B
I.3
---_-----m-w-------- ---w-
The signal Z NC START effects:

a) wind forward of tape until a buffer store (approx. 400
characters) is full. Once LF of the first block has
been read in, the automatic execution sequence begins;
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 63 E.4.84
l b) if the reader has previously run forward at least one block

(in tape search to a specific block), the start of automatic
execution sequence with the last compl,etely read-in block;
c) after a previously programmed stop MOO/MOl, the re-start

of automatic execution sequence;
d) in the operating mode automatic single block D] El) after

"Block executed "and" Auxiliary functions output",
input and execution of the next block.
The same applies when operating from NC memory (internal

block search).
l
If there is no data input enable when the signal % NC START comes,
no data are transferred into the active store and thus no block
is executed. Should the data input enable be applied later,
the data are read into the active store without a new K NC START
signal and program execution begins,
Application note:
If NC start is given during rewind, the program will not be

restarted unless the signal is maintained until "Program active"
is output again.
wnen no return to reference point has been made, the start of the
automatic machining sequence must be interlocked. Thus the
signal % NC START must be interlocked until the signals
*REFERENCE POINT REACHED (2.4.4) are available from the hC.
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 64 E.4.84
2.8 Input signals PC - NC
Interface control access to SINUMERIK
8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8M

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
Application note:
The signal INPUT FROM1ST OPERATOR'SPANEL provides the

possibility to enter data from 2 operator's panels (only
with 8MC). The output is parallel.
"1" signal: Input via first Op. panel

"0" signal: Input via second op. panel
Notes :
a) Connection to NC via cables in series (50 m total)

let Op Panel 2nd Op Panel
I
Logic Rack
MSlOO/X102
b) Cable lengths up to 300 m possible (machine parameters)

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 65 E.4.84
l 2.8.2 X_ _NC-O~E&ATJO~ W_ITHY$lJJACTIVE OPERATOR'S PANEL

I/P ' 1 1 1 ' 1
Using the signal % NC!OPERATION WITHOUT ACTIVE OPERATOR'S PANEL
the control can be operated without the operator's panel (disconnect
op. panel plug).
"0" signal: a) no operator's panel (if necessary disconnect op.

panel plug , as well as logic module)
b) op. panel is de-activated (e.g. using key switch
for panel lock)
e c) Display and operators panel LED's are no longer updated
d) Service-switch set on position 1.
II 1" signal: with operator's panel (op. panel plug connected)
Application notes:
When a "0" signal is applied, data input via the keys and switch
changes are ignored. If the op. panel,plug is disconnected
whilst a "1" signal is applied, an alarm status results.
The 01 signal does not inhibit the NC/PC signal exchange but disables
the NC operators panel interface signal exchanges.
Sequence for handling:
1. Set signal
2. Remove cable from NC-op. panel
3. If necessary, disconnect op. panel from mains.
4. Apply mains
5. Install cable to NC-op.panel
6. Reset signal
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 66 E.4,84
2.8.3 Z DISPLAY DATA FROMPC

---------mm-

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
Application note:
With the aid of the signal 3 DISPLAY DATA FROMPC the PC gains
access to the SINUMERIK display (display lines 2 - 8) in all
NC operating modes.
"0" signal: release of the SINUMERIK display for displaying PC data

(display lines 2. - 8 )
"1" signal: PC has no access to SINUM?ZRIKdisplay
3Z DISPLAY DATA FROMPC
Preparation of display
data by PC
Reception of display
data by NC
(display lines 2 - 8)
PC DISPLAY COORDINATION
(2.8.4a)
NC- PC NC
Display control by
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 67 E.4.84
Application notes:
The display information consists of data. The display of text
information is controlled via designated parameters (flag bytes).
Transfer of the display parameters (see 2.8.4) is enabled via the

signal *DISPLAY INFORMATION FROM PC (o-signal). The access
to the PC memory for further PC-display parameters and display
data is controlled by the parameter PC-DISPLAY COORDINATION.
The transfer of PC display data to the NC display is done

only once, and after the PC display parameter PC-DISPLAY
COORDINATION has been set by the PC (byte # 0, bit pl see 2.8.4).
End of transfer is marked through reset of these parameters

by the NC.
The information transferred remains on the display until

it is rewritten by new PC-information.
The NC-display is again enabled for display of NC-infor-
mation once the signal *DISPLAY INFORMATION FROM PC resumes
II 1 II -status.
NC-alarm 522 is set if

- data module no. is specified "pl" in flag byte 121,
- the data module does not exist within the PC program,
- in flag byte 123 a number 32 is specified for the
begin of information on the display (thus defining
the 1st display line),
- in flag byte 124 the length of information (number of
characters) is specified "@'I.
System 8 (N/Z) 2 - 68 ~.4.84
2.8.4 PC display -------parameter

---
2.8.4.1 Machine data N437

--------------------------- Bit 3 = pl
1 BYTE FOR PC DISPLAY COORDINATION (flag byte 120)

I/P
o/p 8 8 8 8 8 8
The BYTE FOR PC DISPLAY COORDINATION is used to control access of the

PC and NC to the memories, which contain the remaining display data
(PC display parameters and PC display data). When the BYTE FOR PC DISPLAY
COORDINATION has at least one "1" signal in addition to "0" signals,
PC display data are transmitted to the SINUMERIK display (byte # 0,
setting by PC = input signals). Transmission of PC display data is ended
by cancelling the BYTE (byte = 0, cancellation by NC = ouput signals).
2.8.4.2 Machine data N437

--------------------------- Bit 3 = 1
a>l. 1 Bit PC-Displaycoordination (flag 120.0)

E/A 1 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal: initiates the transfer of PC-datas into the SINUMERIK display,
provided that the signal *DISPLAY INFORMATION FROM PC (2.8.3)
and the display parameters (marker byte 121 to 124) are set.
(Bit is set by PC).
"0" signal: Is set by NC at the end of a data transfer from PC to the

NC-display.
(Bit is cancelled by NC).
a)2. DISPLAY ERASE (flag 120.1)

E/A 1 1 1 1 1 1
I
"I" signal: NC display, line 2 to 8 is erased, provided that *DISPLAY

INFORMATION FROM PC (2.8.3) is set.
(Bit is set by PC).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 69 E.4.84
"0" signal: is set by NC, after display has cleared. (Bit cancelled by NC)
b) 1 BYTE FOR DATA MODULE NO.

"'-""""~"" (flag byte -m-s121)

I/P 8 8 8 8 8 8
The BYTE FOR DATA MODULE NO. defies the number of the data module,
in which the PC display data to be transmitted are stored (see
diagram on next page).
c) 1-- BYTE-----------_------------
FOR RELATEVE DATA START IN DATA MODULE (flag byte -m-m
122)
I 8-r Sprint 8T Sprint 8M 8MC 8N 8M
The BYTE FOR RELATIVE DATA START IN DATA MODULE defines the start
of the PC display data (in the data module) which is to be
transmitted (see diagram on next page).
d) 1 BYTE FOR DATA START ON THE DISPLAY

--------------------- (flag tyte- - 123)
- -
I/P 8 8 8 8 8 8
The BYTE FOR DATA START ON THE DISPLAY defines the area on the
SINUMERIK display for the start of the PC display data to be transmitted.
e) 1 BYTE FOR DATA LENGTH

-------------- (flag byte-124]

I/P 8 8 8 8 8 8
The BYTE FOR DATA LENGTH defines the length of the pC display data in the
data module or on the SINUMERIK display (see diagram below).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 70 E.4.84
PC display parameter:
see for Bit designation, when machine
data N 437.3 is set "I", (2.8.6)
TOP LINE LINE

MB120 1
2
MB 121 .
.
*MB 122 .
.
Text
MB 123
i
-
MB 124
DWm 1)
I
Displayparameter
1)Display-Position
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 71 E.4.84
2.8.5 CYCLE INHIBIT

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"I" signal: All cycles (fixed user sub-routines L81 to L99

and L900 to L999) are inhibited and cannot be
stored, modified, displayed or output,
R parameters R50 - R99 are not updated for
display during program execution.
Whenever the option B72 is used, it is absolutely
necessary to set this signal to "I", after these
cycles are stored. For service purposes (access) we
recommend to provide a switch to allow deactivation
of "CYCLE INHIBIT".
"0" signal: Cycles can be output. R parameters can be output. I
fiEelication
------------- note
When the "I" signal is active -no cycles can be input, edited,
displayed or output and neither can the R paramters R50-R99.
With "CYCLE INHIBIT" active, ("I"-status), some blocks are

already processed while being in an intermediate storage
level with the advantage of saving time.
This applies to the following blocks:
1. Parameter definition and arithmetic operations in which
R-parameters R 50 to R 99 are used.
2. Jump commands
3. Blocks without information, e.a. N200 LF
or N205 (comment) LF
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 72
2.8.6 Display of PC-data in the input-buffer of the NC (01)

The function "PC-data into input-buffer" is only available if
-the machine data N437, bit 3=1
-and the signal *DISPLAYINFORMATION FROM THE PC is
not active.
The specific transfer-operations in flag byte 120 are
handshake-controlled.
NC-Alarm 522 is set, if

-in flag byte 121 the data module no. is specified pI
-the data module specified does not exist
-the length of information in flag byte 124 is
specified $
2.8.6.1 ------------
PC DATA TO INPUT BUFFER (flag 120.2)
I8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

I/O 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
II 1 11-status: Activates the transfer of PC-data into the

input buffer of the NC-display (display line 8)
based on the parameters specified in flag byte
121, 122, 124 (signal set by PC).
0 -status: Set by NC after the transfer of PC-data into

the NC-display is completed (acknowledgement
of NC).
&pElication
------- note:
If some characters are already stored in the input-buffer,
the PC-data transferred are added on. If you do not want that
to happen, the function INPUT BUFFER RESET (2.8.6.2) may
be used to clear the display line. The number of characters
held in the input-buffer (display input-line) is limited to
32 characters (see section 2.8.6.4, 2.8.6.5, 2.8.6.6).
E.4.84
I/O I 1 1 1 1 1 1
II 1 II -status: Activates RESET of the input-buffer

(signal set by PC).
"0"-status: Set by the NC, following RESET of input-buffer

(acknowledgement by NC).
0 2.8.6.3 ------------ERROR ANALYSIS

PC-INPUT (flag 120.4)
I8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
I/O I 1 1 1 1 1 1
II 1 II -status: Activates the error analysis after input-

button takeover (see section 2.8.6.5, 2.8.6.6),
(signal set by PC).
'IO"-status: set by NC following the check-routine

(acknowledgement of NC).
a The error
General
501
analysis
programming error
includes the following NC-alarms:
512 Input disabled

513 Memory overflow
514 Block with more than 120 characters
531 MDI-AUTO: Block with more than 40 characters
as well as format errors. The alarm bit in flag 120 is set.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 74 E.4.84
PC input error analysis:
65ms
INPUT -key
NC
CONTROL BUSY
(2.4.6) I
PC-INPUT ERROR )
ANALYSIS (2.8.6.3)
I
I
I
120,CHARACTERS
EXCEEDED (2.8.6.5)
or ERRANEOUS CHARACTERS
IN INPUT LINE (buffer)
(2.8.6.6)
2.8.6.4 32
w---------m
CHARACTERS EXCEEDED (flag 120.5)
I 8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
I/O,1 1 1
II
1 II -status: After RESET of the signal PC-DATA TO INPUT BUFFER
by the NC, if more than 32 characters of PC-data
have been transferred (signal set by NC).
"O"-status: If a) no error occurred

b) the PC cancels the "I"-status
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 75 E.4.84
2.8.6.5 40/120 CHARACTERS EXCEEDED (flag

------------a 120.6)
Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M ~MC 8N

I 8~
I/O I 1
II
1 "-status: After PC-INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS has been set and
(in the NC-mode MDI-AUTO) an input block of
more than 40 characters or (in MDI/Part program
mode) an input block exceeding 120 characters
was generated (signal set by NC).
"0"-status: If a) the signal PC-INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS is

not set (2.8.6.3)
b) The signal (2.8.6.3) is set and no
error is found
c) The "1"-status is cancelled by the PC
2.8.6.6 ERRANEOUS CHARACTERS IN INPUT-BUFFER

-----aa------w-w --- (flag 120.7)
l 8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
I/O I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
II 1 II -status: Follows the setting of PC-INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS

if the NC-alarms 512 or 513 occur or a general
format error has been detected in the input
buffer (e.g. underscore of input value),
(signal set by NC).
"0"-status: If a) the signal PC-INPUT ERROR ANALYSIS

is not set (2.8.6.3)
b) the signal (2.8.6.3) is set and no
error is found
c) the "I" -status is cancelled by the PC
The flag bytes 121, 122, 124 are as described in section

2.8.4/ b, c, d, and e.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 76 E.4.84
2.9 Input signals PC --$ NC
Interface control influence on program sequence
2.9.1 3 DATA
------a--INPUT ENABLE
l 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8~

I/PI '1 1 1 1 1 1
The signal Z DATA INPUT ENABLE is active in automatic, MD1 auto

and all setting-up modes. It enables data transfer into the active
store.
Auxiliary
-----w---m functions Fogrammed
---------I--- in the machining Fogram
m-m
f+J
F------Y
(in automatic
L--------2-------,-L
E!l . in MD1 auto a J
"0" signal: allows transfer of data from the buffer stores

into the active stores,
a) when "Block executed" and auxiliary functions
from the previous block are output
b) in automatic single block Bj mi or prior
MOO/M01following NC start (2.7.2) if the
next block is read in.
"1" signal: inhibits transfer of data from the.buffer store into

the active store.
System 8 (~/2) E.4.84
e-a* NGXZFSTM LF N *.*

Transfer into
buffer store
i\
//////////A 1
Content of , NGXhFSTM LF
buffer store I I
I
I
A DATA INPUT ENABLE I I
Block executed
Data transfer
Output of auxiliary
function
---v---
Axis in motion -r
interrogation point for
data input enable
(Output of auxiliary functions during axis motion)
Auxiliary functions
_----__---_----_____-------- programmed in the machining program
(applies
----------------- in all setting-up modes)
Input auxiliary functions are activated when 32 DATA INPUT

ENABLE (active status ^= 0 ) is applied and the input button
is pressed.
(see 2.6.2)
System s(N/2) 2 - 78 E.4.84
2.9.2 K GENERAL FEED DRIVE ENABLE

---------------
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8M ~MC 8 814
1 1 1 1 1
I/P
In automatic mode DJ
------------------------ - , MD1 auto />)I3 and all
setting-up modes
----m--w
"0" signal: Effects feed enable for all axes
"1" signal: Effects feed hold for all axes, e.g. actuating a feed
hold switch or button or removal of NC READY 2
(2.13.1).
Axes in motion are stopped along the contour. The
position loop remains active, i.e the following
error is eliminated.
X GENERAL FEED DRIVE

ENABLE
3 MOTION COMMAND e.g. +X),
(2.4.2)
i III4
III \
FEED HOLD
(3.3)
FEED START
(3-3) l
X axis in motion
Block executed
controlled approach
(Actuation of a feed hold switch or button)
Application note:
General feed enable must be,applied in addition to the individual

axis feed enable (2.9.3).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 79 E.4.84
2.9*3 __ -----
*FEED ENABLE (axis SpeCifiC)

2 2 4 IO 3 4
I/P
The interface control issues a 3 FEED ENABLE signal separately
for each axis.
d
In operating modes automatic l3l L JDI------auto 171
__________-__----
"0" signal: Effects feed enable for the required axis
"1" signal: Effects feed hold for all axes only when the enable
to an axis in motion is removed. In this case all
axes are brought to standstill along the contour.
The position loop remains active, i.e. the following
error is eliminated.
In all setting-up
------------ modes
_-. -
"0" signal: Effects feed enable for the required axis
"1" signal: Effects feed hold for the required axis
Application note:
The only axis which is stopped is the one with no feed

enable signal.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 80 E.4.84
2.9.4 X --------w
CONTROLLERENABLE
I 8T Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8~

I/PI 2 2 4 IO 3 4
There is a separate 3c CONTROLLER
ENABLE signal for each axis.
"0" signal: Allows the position loop for the required axis to be
closed
"1" signal: Effects immediate stopping of the associated axis. In
this case the position loop is opened and the drive
decelerated with maximum braking current. If the
automatic + or MD1 auto 3 modes are being
Dl cl
used, all axes in motion are stopped. The axes
which still have controller enable are, however
stopped using digital speed = 0. (Following error
is eliminated by drive).
K MOTION COMMAND
+X
(2.4.2)
x CONTROLLER
ENABLE X
3ZFEED ENABLE X
(2.9-3)
Clamping X
X axis in motion
% CONTROLLER
DISABLE X
(4,2.2/4.3.2)
e.g LIMIT SWITCH +X

(Z-9.7) Rapid deceleration
TW = 1 ms to 32000 ms (machine parameter)

Standard value4QC 2 400 ms
l- 32000 steps of I ms
System 8 (N/2) 2 -
~.4.84
81
Application notes:
Any following error remaining after rapid deceleration is

automatically reset by the control.
Time TW = 1 ms to32fi00 ms (settable using machine parameters):
After completion of the deceleration process % CONTROLLER
ENABLE (4,2.2/4.2.3) to the servo controller for the appropriate
axis is removed.
The controller enable signals must always be applied so that the
position loops for the drives can operate with maximum gain.
Exceptions:
Axes with clamping or traversing onto a limit switch (2.9.4 diagram),
F;or clamped axes (feed drives inhibited) *CONTROLLER ENABLE should be a

'111" signal to the NC.
In the handwheel mode, the controller enable signalmust be enabled

for the respective axis.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 82 E.4.84
2.9.5 DECELERATION
a------ (for return to datum)
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ 8~

I/P 2 2 -4 10 3 4
In the operating mode "Return to datum" the control system

responds to a limit switch signal DECELERATIONfor each axis,
This signal sets the approach speed, e.g. rapid, for the return
to datum movement.
Both signal flanks are effective:
"0" to "1" transition: Effects deceleration of the selected axis to a

switch-off speed preset in the control
"1" to "0" transition: Initiates the final movement to the next

zero transition of the measuring system.
4
a) Resolver or INDUCTOSYN measuring system:
Results in a move to the next measuring system
zero cross-over
b) Digital measuring system:

Results in a move 2mm beyond the next marker
Application notes:
This function is best realised by a cam or a normally open
contact.
If no limit switch is available which closes again quickly enough
(see adjustment), two cams should be used.
* ihe grid shift for the three measuring systems must be considered.
System 8(N/2) 2 - 83 E.4.84
l ----Return &o-&t@-
Traverse characteristic:
1
Return to datum
speed e.g. rapid
R
Switch-off speed
a Direction button
-Z
Synchronisation
DECELERATION ..
.. .
Actuation cam .. .
a) with 1 switch
~-+---~-----
b) with 2 switches \
The return to datum is initiated by the associated direction button

(with Systems 8M, 8MC the axis must also be selected). At the "0" to
"1" transition of the DECELERATION signal the drive for the associated
axis is reduced to the switch-off speed from the return to datum speed.
After the "1" to "0" transition the axis traverses to the next zero
transition of the measuring system: finally a signal % DATUM REACHED
(2.4.4) is output for the appropriate axis. Indication is given
on SINUMERIK display.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 84 ~.4.84
Diagram:
------------- Return to datum
mm-
Operating mode -r
Axis selection I
Direction button (e.g. +X)
3 MOTION COMMAND+X
(2.4.2)
X axis in motion,
return to datum speed
X axis decelerates to
switch-off speed
X axis traverses to
datum point
DECELERATION X
% DATUM POINT REACHEDX

(2.4.4)
Indication on SINUMERIK
display
Synchronisation point
Application notes:
The cam length must be such that it is possible to allow deceleration

from the return to datum speed to the switch-off speed.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 85 E.4.84
The last edge generated by the reference point cam should be adjusted such
that the axis is within the same measuring period, 0,5 - 1,5mm of
a) the zero cross over of the analogue measuring device
b) the next marker of the digital measuring device.
The switching repeatability of the datum point limit switch must be within
0,2mm for the creep speed set in the control.
Reference point R: a) Fixed by a limit switch and zero mark of the

measuring device
b) zero cross over point and 2mm
a) Analogue measuring system

- MeasUring2,.,.,,.,.,_,
Period
Traverse direction
Delay
b 1 Digital Measuring
System + 2mm
9
ztv
AR 8P
u-l
Marker Y
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 86 E.4.84
mechanical adjustment by rotating the resolver, moving the INDUCTOSYN

slider, rotating the ROD encoder-or moving the scale measuring head.
Electrically shifting via machine parameters (grid shift)
Application notes:
It is not essential to adjust the measuring system by mechanical means.

It can also be displaced by machine parameters.
Reference return is not possible if the limit switch is already on the

cam.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 87 E.4.84
a 2.9.6 EXTERNAL
----------- DECELERATION

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
The signal EXTERNAL DECELERATION is common to all axes and is

effective for all types of axis movement (except threading G33).
"1" signal: The speed of all moving axes is reduced to a lower

speed preset in the control. (machine parameters)
"0" signal: No deceleration
Application note:
l
The EXTERNAL DECELERATION signal provides the possibility of
extending the,traverse range of the individual axes and is
used when traversing to a mechanical limit switch.
Traverse to a limit
-------------- switch
Example:
e.g. rapid e-m

traverse
l
reduced speed = maximum -.-
machining speed
1st 2nd Emergency

limit limit limit
switch switch switch
external limit
deceleration switch
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 88 E.4.84
In the example Ahe limit switch is separated

from the emergency limit switch by a distance equivalent to the
stopping distance at maximum machining speed. Using the
EXTERNALDECELERATIONsignal when traversing at high speed, e.g.
axes are decelerated to a preset lower speed, which
in this example is the same as the maximum machining speed.
After passing the limit switch the drives are stopped by the
signal LIMIT SWITCH (2.9.7).
EXTERNALDECELERATION
LIMIT SWITCH +Z
(2.9.7)
Z axis in motion
e.g. rapid traverse
Z axis decelerates to
reduced speed
Z axis is braked to zero
If the reduced speea is less than the maximum machining speed, the
traverse range is extended even more, but a non-symmetric surface
finish will result for all machining feed rates above the reduced speed.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - a9 E.4.84
2.9.7 LIMIT
w---w- SWITCH
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ aM

4 8 20 6
The interface control gives a LIMIT SWITCH signal for both

directions of each axis when an axis traverse onto a limit switch.
(Priority sequence ; see 2.9.6).
These signals, which are specific to both axis and direction,
make enable logic in the interface control unnecessary.
"1" signal: Depending on the machine parameter this effects

traverse to a point or rapid deceleration with
elimination of the following error.
"0" signal: Normal status
When an axis traverses onto a limit switch three methods of

stopping are possible:
a> Controlled
----------m---m traverse to a point:
is initiated by LIMIT SWITCH signal
b) Rapid
----------- deceleration with ----------------
elimination of following error:
If the bit "Immediate stop at limit switch" is set in the

machine parameters, the digital speed = 0 is output
immediately after the LIMIT SWITCH signal. The position
loop remains closed and the following error is eliminated.
It is not necessary to input the program again.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 90 E.4.84
If the controller enable signal

is removed at the (2.9.4)
same time as the LIMIT SWITCH signal is output , the
position loop is opened; in this case the drives are normally
stopped using maximum braking current ( the machine parameter
"Immediate stop at limit switch" must not be set). Any
remaining following error is automatically cancelled. The
program must be re-started. Before traversing off the limit
switch the controller enable signal must be re-applied.
Software limits offer an additional advantage over the mechanical

switches c) in that the drive deceleration distance per axis is
doubled from maximum speed at maximum braking current, because the
braking point is referenced to the following error value which is in
front of the overtrayel switch.
System 8 ('N/2) 2 - 91 ~.4.84
summary.
Rapidbraking with Rapid braking with
Type of Controlled a)
max. braking cyrrenkremoval of follow@ A .roach
braking error
b)digital position - A - B
Position
Open Closed Closed
loop
Amit switch and 'Limit swltchvl +bit ':
Cancelled Signal f
Immediate stop at z
removal of controller limit switch,, "Limit switch"
I-A P*C)
The position of the mechanical limit switch corresponds to point A

The position of the software limit switch corresponds to point B
Software
-----e-m limit switch:
---
In place of the mechanical limit switch it is possible to define

the positions of the traverse rangen limits (two per axis referred
to the machine zero point) by machine parameters in the control.
In this case no mechanical limit switches are required.
However, rapid deceleration at maximum current is not possible
in this case, because no signal is given to the interface section.
a) Controlled Traverse to a Point
The deceleration phase is initiated when the calculated actual value

corresponds to the position coordinates of the software limit switch
(point b) defined by machine parameters, i.e the deceleration starts
at a point which lies at a distance in front of point b corresponding
to the following error at the time.
The software limit is exceeded by a small amount proportional to the
defined acceleration factor.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 92 E.4.84
b) Rapid Deceleration with Elimination of Following Error
The end of the traversed path is independent of the defined

acceleration factor but proportional to some speed behind the defined
software limit (max. 2mm). The braking point is proportional to the
following error and also to the defined KV factor.
c) The return movement is defined by the acceleration characteristics

of the drive.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 93 E.4.84
2.9.8 3Zmm
FOLLOW-UP
----m--w- OPERATION
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 814~ 8~ 8~

I/P 2 2 4 10 3 4
A separate signal 3Z FOLLOW-UPOPERATIONis available for

each axis.
"0" signal: NC position loop open; drives controlled from

external velocity command signal,
"1" signal: Normal condition, NC position loop closed.
% MOTION COMMAND
+X I I
(2.4.2)
i i
I
I I
% FOLLOW-UPOPERATIONX I I
X axis in motion
(controlled from NC)
X axis in motion
(controlled externally)
Application notes:
Separate signal for each axis.
A "0" signal effects rapid deceleration at max. current if the
axis is in motion. The position control loop for the axis is
opened and the actual position value then "follows up". *CONTROLLER
INHIBIT (4.2.2) remains 111" signal.
Once follow-up operation is cancelled ("1" signal) no
re-synchronising of the axis (return to datum) is required.
Independent of the operating mode, cancellation of follow-up
operation during program execution can result in incorrect
positioning.
System 8 (M/2) 2 - 94 E.4.84
Any axis in follow up mode (axis controlled externally) must

not be addressed by program in automatic modes, or else
FEED HOLD is generated (operators panel LED will be lit).
The following seguence is to be adhered to in every automatic

mode:
- In follow up mode, all axes that are not in this condition
(axes controlled by NC part program) may be moved.
- READ ENABLE is cancelled in one block.
- By cancelling READ ENABLE, the follow up mode is terminated.
During termination of follow up mode, none of the axes is
to be moved and no remaining distance to go held in
memory.
- With end of block execution (no move command of axis is
output) an automatic interrupt without RESET into manual
mode is initiated. Thus a synchronisation of the position
system is achieved. No movement is necessary for the
synchronisation. No data is lost when switching into
manual mode.
- After switching back into AUTOMATIC, READ ENABLE is set
again and NC-START generated.
- Now all axes can be moved NC-controlled (via part program
as demonstrated with X and Z). The axis having been in
follow up mode before must now be programmed absolutely.
*READ ENABLE
*FOLLOW UP MODE X
AUTO-INTERRUPT
Block executed
(e.a. no more
commands are
output)
X-axis in motion
(externally controlled)
X-axis in motion
(NC-controlled)
Z-axis in motion
(NC-controlled)
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 95
0 2.9.9 2ND SOF!ZWAFUZ

--.----I------~ LIMIT SWITCH - X ACTIVE
8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ 8M

I/P 1 1
Application note:
With tailstock forward.
"1" signal: 2nd software limit switch for the minus X direction
is active
"0" signal: 1st software limit switch is active.

System 8(~/2) 2 - 96 E.4.84
2.9.10 X _ZERO
_ _ OFFSET
_ _ _ _GROUP (8MC, 8M, Sprint
_ _ ----------- -s-w---- 8M) (02)
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8~

I/PI - 2 2 -2
Zero offset
2 3
group
0 1
I
Input lines
II Nl to N4 N5 to N8 N9 to N12
Settable II W (3% G5Q

zero offset to to to
G57 G7 G57
Application notes:
With the 8MC, 8M, Sprint 8M 12 zero offsets per
axis can be selected. These are activated via the
interface PC - NC usung the functions G54 to G57
and giving the zero offset group.
The input signals (code A/B) are static signals and are to be
considered per block.
A change in one of these inputs and their corresponding zero
offset group becomes Bffective 2 blocks later.
2 - 97
In order to provide a save and defined modification of

a zero offset group, the following programming technigue
is recommended:
.
.
.
N70 M83 LF (The NC defines with M83 (e.g.) the
3rd zero offset group)
N71 GO4 F... LF (The dwell time programmed is to be
specified bigger than 1.2 max. PC
cycle time)
N72 L999 LF (Intermediate storage clearing)
N73 G56 X... Z...LF (Selection of 11th zero offset)
Following end of program or a program interrupt, a manual

machine movement is to be taken into account, while else
the NC refers to the last selected zero offset group
and not the actual machine position.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 98 E.4.84
2.9.11 H __----------e-w
FEEDRATE MULTIPLICATION FACTOR a
8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8~ 8MC 8~ 8M
I/P 4 4 4 4 4 4
Application example:
Used in the production of test components made from easily

machined material and utilizing unchanging part programs.
"0" signal: In the operating modes automatic[3] , MD1 auto @

the programmed feedrate is increased by the factor
2, 4, 8, or 16+ The function is comparable with
the feedrate override switch (6.6).
0
"1" signal: Programmed feedrate
2.9.12 3Z FEEDRATE
__----------- REDUCTION 1 : 100
8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8~

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: In the setting-up modes the programmed feedrate is

reduced by a factor of 100.
"1" signal: Programmed feedrate
Application notes: a
The signal % FEEDRATE REDUCTION 1 : 100 can only be utilized
in the setting-up modes.
In the modes automatic and MD1 auto this reduction is initiated
in the control by the functions 1~36and IQ?.
Feedrate reduction 1 : 100, feedrate weighting 1 : 100 (2.11.3.5:)
and the feedrate override switch (~5.6) are'multiplicative in the
setting-up modes. The smallest possible feedrate is approx.
50 x 10m6 mm/min.
a
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 99
2.9.13 *4TH AXIS

___-------- = MAIN AXIS (Sprint 8M)
I 8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8Mc 8~
I/P I - 1
"O"-signal: 4th axis = main axis
II
1 II -signal: 3rd axis = main axis
Application note:
With SINUMERIK control Sprint 8M (4 axes) the 4th axis can
be defined as main axis. A secondary axis is not effected
l by tool offset., This signal has to be set before the 1st
NC start (program start). A change during program execution
is not responded to.
2.9.14 REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGE DELAY (8~)

---------------
8T Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N
I/P - 1
"O"-signal: normal state

l II 1 II -signal: Decoded M function (e.g. MIO) (see 2.6.6)
Application note:
The signal BLOCK CHANGE DELAY is used to generate the
start condition for auxiliary equipments, e.g. tapping
attachement, following positioning of coordinates, or the
completed output of auxiliary functions, and to prevent
a premature start of the next axis movement by withholding
READ ENABLE (during tAl)
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 100 E.4.84
2.9.15 X CANCEL
----I------ DISTANCE TO GO
e
I 8T Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 811
VP I 1 1
lllll/llOH transition: Canc31 distance to go

11011/11111 transition: Distance to go is not cancelled
Application notes:
On the "1" to "0" transition the distance to go for each axis is

cancelled (difference: command and actual position). Any following
error is traversed. An active dwell block is interrupted.
Programming a G91 in the block directly following a *CANCEL DISTANCE
TO GO causes transition errors.
See programming instructions 8M/Sprint 8M/8MC
The signal *CANCEL DISTANCE TO GO must last for 20 ms.

System 8 (N/2) ~.4.84
2 - 101
2.9.16 *CANCEL REMAINING

--_------------------ SUB-ROUTINE REPETITIONS
8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
In the
---- operating
-------- modes automatic,
-------- MD1 auto
"O"-signal: Effects cancellation of the remeining active

subroutine repetitions
I,
1 11 -signal: No cancellation of remaining active sub-
routine repetitions
Application note:
Cancellation of repeat rest-numbers of a subroutine
can be done via PC. This allows the synchronisation of
the NC to an external reported machine position.
Normally the current repeat cycle is continued until
the Ml7 (the a-signal must remain until the end of the
subprogram).
For a defined cancellation of subroutine repeat numbers
the following way of programming and signal sequence
from the interface is to be obeyed (see section 2.4.5).
Programming:
N5 LF
NIO L8099 LF (Program call in which the repeat
rest-number is to be cancelled. The
PC resets with Ml7 SR-REPEAT REST-NO.
CANCEL).
Nil GO4 F... LF (The defined dwell time is to be
specified bigger than 1.2 max. PC
cycle time)
N12a.31 or L999 LF (Intermediate storage clearance)
Interface sequence:
"SR REPEAT RESET NO. CANCEL
active Ml7 decoded

*M-MOD. -SIGNAL
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 102 E.4.84
2.9.17 % m------m
AXIS CHANGEOVER(8MC)
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~

I/P - 1 -
"0" s ignal : Axis changeover in accordance with machine parameter
"1" s ig-nal : No axis changeover
Application notes:
Activation can be indirectly programmed via the auxiliary functions
and feedback via the interface control.
The axes to be changed and any change in sign are determined by a
machine parameter. Axis changeover can also be effected in the
setting-up modes. The data display indicates the changed value.
A return to datum is required after axis changeover.
Since for "0" signal an axis changeover can only be effected by the
measuring loop output, all axis-related signals for the appropriate
axes must be changed from NC *PC and PC *NC.
Application example: machine with an angled head

System 8 (DJ/~) 2 - 103 E.4.84
2.9.18 MIRROR IMAGE

x_--------

I/P 2 2 3 3 2 3
2.9.18.1 System 8~, Sprint ET, 8N

"0" signal: Mirror image possible in the selected axes X, Z (all
combinations).
X axis:
w-m-
Mirror image of
- programmed values (incluging ~92 offset)
- tool nose radius compensation (G&l, G42)
- tool length compensation
- position of tool cutter point
No mirror image Of
- zero offset
Z axis:
----
Mirror image of
- programmed values (including G92 offset)
- tool nose radius compensation (Wl, G42)
No mirror image of
- zero offset
- position of tool cutter point
"1" signal: Mirror image de-activated
Application notes:
Mirror image in the X axis always mirrors the axis.

Mirror image in the Z axis always mirrors the workpiece.
System 8 (rv/2) 2 - 104 E.4.84
2.9.18.2 8M, Sprint 8~, ~MC
"0" signal: Mirror image possible in the selected main axes

X, Y, 2 (all combinations)
The following applies for the main axes X, Y, Z:
Mirror image of
- programmed values (including G92 offset)
- cutter radius compensation (&l, G42)
& mirror image of
- zero offset
"1" signal: Mirror image not active
Application note:
Mirror image of the main axes X, Y, Z always refers to the workpiece.
CahXlatiOn in the NC is a maximum of two part program blocks delayed.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 105 E.4.84
l 2.10 Input signals to spindle controller PC 4 NC
2.10.1 H SECONDRAMP VALUE FOR SPINDLE/

------------m-e *KV CHANGE (on9JN)
mm------
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8~

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"0" signal: Active when switching the ramp time to take

account of large inertias
"1" signal: Normal (first) ramp time
signal as KV change signal

l The EN uses this
11011 signal: The KV factor under machine data TE NISCJ is active
I I signal: The KV factor under machine data TE 220 is active

(milling, laser cutting and plasma cutting)
2.10.2 3i SPINDLE CSCILLATE

----------
I 8~ SDrint 8~ SDrint 8~ ~Mc 8~ 8~
I/P I 1 1
"0" signal: Used to activate a fixed speedAnmot for

gear engagement
"1" signal: Oscillation value around command value zero

is not activated.
Application notes:
The time of the rotation in either direction is determined by
the signal SPINDLE ROTATION COMMANDCLOCKWISE (2.10.3).
A "0" signal de-activates the % SPINDLE AT SPEED signal (2.6.16).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 106 E.4.84
2.10.3 SPINDLE ROTATION COMMANDCLOCKWISE

------------------ a

I/P 1 1 1 1 - 1
The signal normally acts as feedback of the commanded direction

of rotation resulting from MO3/MO4.
"1" signal: Positive voltage (commanded rotation clockwise)
"0" signal: Negative voltage (commanded rotation anti-clockwise)
Application notes:
Brief change of direction for chip breaking or spindle oscillation

for gear engagement in order to define the time period or direction
for the oscillation.
Response of the PC to a change of spindle command speed (2.11.3.6)
and SPINDLE ROTATION COMMANDCLOCKWISE: The PC always changes
the direction first and then shortly after the value (or both
together). If the value were changed first and only later the
direction, acceleration in the wrong direction could occur!
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 107 E.4.84
2.10.4 SPINDLE STOP

-------
,I 8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8~

I/PI 1 1 1
"1" signal: a) Stops the spindle; deceleration in accordance

with ramp characteristic
b) Completion of Ml9 function, spindle in
position (2.6.15).
"0" signal: Spindle does not stop

Pulse length larger/equal 20ms
Application notes:
SPINDLE STOP, EMERGENCYSTOP, and progr. S = 0 brings the spindle to a stop

down the reference ramp line. After the stop followed by a defined dwell
period (machine parameter), OV (Speed command contact opens) is output as
well as controller inhibit (*CONTROLLER INHIBIT 4.2.2/4.3.2)
After SPINDLE STOP is removed, the previous speed command value becomes
active and the spindle runs to speed. Ml9 disables SPINDLE STOP. After
reaching the Ml9 position (*SPINDLE POSITION REACHED 2.6.15), SPINDLE STOP
OV and controller inhibit output without a delay and a block change is enabled
for the active program.
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 108 E.4.84
2.10.5.. K GEAR CODING

------- e
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8M ~MC 8~ 8M
I/P 3 3 3 3 - 3
A larger speed range for the machine spindle can be achieved

by connecting the D.C. motor to a gearbox. Since the spindle
programming refers to the speed of the machine spindle and not
the D.C. motor, it is necessery to take the gear stages into
account when calculating the speed command value.
The gear stages are programmed using address M and, following

decoding in the interface control, selected by the machine control.
The feed back takes the form of a code: 0
GE
3ar stage 12 3 4 5 6
1 4
/
Code A 1 0 1 0 1 0
Input Code B 1 1 0 0 1 1
signals Code C 1 1 11 ,o 0
During output of the analo_g spindle speed the control takes the
gear stages into account such that the programmed speed is assumed
by the machine spindle
Gear stage 1 is associated with the lowest spindle speed range.

Non-assigned gear stages must not be offered to the control.
The input signals are interrogated continuously, i.e. any change

in the code immediately (approx. 20 ms) effects the corresponding
change in the speed.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 109 E.4.84
2.11 Data transfer PC -NC
2.11.1 2-----------I----
BYTES FOR EXTERNALDATA INPUT

I/P 16 16 16 16 16 16
Using the 2 bytes for external data input the following inputs
can be realised:
- tool offset
- zero offset
- program no. selection
- feedrate words 1, 2
- spindle speed command value (not with EN)
- R parameter words 1,2,3
- selection of axis combinations synchronous with traversing axis
- selection of 1 from a max. of 8 reference points in the
1st axis (~Mc)
- indication on the SINUMERIK display of an interface
section alarm
The above input functions are valid for all operating modes.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 110 ~.4.84
The "1" to rrO" flank of the " % Mod. signal for data transfer"
initiates transfer of a word into the NC using the 2 bytes for
external data input.
General time-dependent conditions:
2) 4)
+2Omsj+-2Oms+
I' % Mod. signal for
data transfer" , I
2 bytes for external

data input
The following conditions are minimum prerequisites:

1) At the "l'to "CPtransition of the 'I % Mod. signal for data
transfer" a recognised word must be contained in the
2 bytes for external data input.
2) The "0" status of the " X Mod. signal for data transfer"
must last at least 20 ms.
3) The word in the 2 bytes for external data input must
still be valid 20 ms after the "1" to "0" transition of
the " 3 Mod. signal for data transfer".
4) The "1" status of the 'I ZEMod. signal for data transfer" must
last at least 20 ms.
Application notes:
The minimum cycle time for transmission is therefore 40 ms.
Tool offsets and zero offsets (supplementary offset or additive
zero offset) require the axis coding (2.11.2).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 111 E.4.84
l 2.11.2 AXE3 CODING

-3--c-
I,J 8; Sprini 8T Sprin; 8~ 8;~ 8; 8;
The signals AXIS CODING are used to assign the 2 bytes for external
data input (2.11.1) to the axes or radius compensation stores
(2.11.3, l/2/3.).
The 4 inputs should be coded as follows:
Application notes:
Axis coding is required for tool offsets and zero offsets. With
SINUMERIK 8T, Sprint 8T and 8N, only axes no. 1 and 2 apply (Code
A,B,C,D).
With SINUMERIK 8M, Sprint 8M, the axis codes only apply to the 1st ts 4th
to 4th axis and radius.
With SINUEMRIK 8MC, the axis codes apply to the 1st to 10th axis
and radius.
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 112 E.4.84
2.11.3 Mod. signals for data transfer
2.11.3.1 X TOOL OFFSET
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ SM

I/P I 1 1 1 1 1 1
111"/110'1 transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the

2 bytes for external data input (e.g. +121)
it is added in the tool offset store (depending
on axis coding).
lVO"/lV1ll transition: no addition

2)
3 TOOL OFFSET d-20 me3

data input
Axis coding
Tool offset store

for 2nd axis t 5678 t 5799
Application notes:
The tool offset data are added in the tool offset stores called up
in the program. The existing word (+5678) is overwritten (+5799).
The information becomes effective up to two part program blocks

later (see 2.4.5).
2 BYTES FOR
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT H G F E D C B A
Tool offset 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
2 BYTES FOR EXTERNAL

DATA INPUT Q P 0 NMLKI
Tool offset 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100

sign
. A
max. representation: + 7.999 min; 2 0.7999 in. or + 0.07999 in,

System 8 (~/2) 2 - 113 E.4.84
l 2.11.3.2 3 -1-----11-
SUPPLEMENTARY OFFSET.
I,p 1 8: Sprint 8T Spyin; 8~ 8:~ 8: 8;,-
11111/11011
transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the 2
bytes for external data input (e.g + 222) the
transfer into the store for supplementary offsets
is effected (depending on axis coding)
11011/11111
transition: No transfer
l k SUPPLEMENTARY OFFSET

data input
Axis coding
Store for supplementary

offset for 2nd axis
Application notes:
The supplementary offset data are written in separate stores and

0 added to the programmed position data. An existing word in the
supplementary offset store will be overwritten.
The information becomes effective up to two part program

blocks later (see 2.4.5).
2 BYTES FOR EXTERNAL H G F E D C B A

DATA INPUT
SUPPLEMENTARYOFFSET 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
-- . _-.--A---- ^._- - .-.
- -.-- _-.. __- 1
2 BYTES FOR EXTERNAL Q P '.- 0 N h L K I
DATA INPUT
OFFSET 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 loo
0 SUPPLEMENTARY sign ~---L.---.-L.... . .A--.--aLJ
max. representation: 2 7.999 min; 2 0.7999 in. or + 6.07999 in.

System8(11/2) 2 - 114 E.4.84
2.11.3.3 3 ADDITIVE ZERO OFFSET
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8M

I/P I 1
11111/1101'transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the

2 bytes for external data input (e.g. +222) it
is add&d in the zero offset store (depending
on axis coding).
"0"/111" transition: No addition
k ADDITIVE ZERO
OFFSET
-e--

data input
/ I
! I
Axis coding /////// IA 0100
\ "
\ '1
&
Zero offset store + 910 + 1132
for 2nd axis
Application note:
The zero offset data is added to the programmed position

values in the store. The existing word (e.g. +910) in the
zero offset store is overwritten.
max. representation: 2 7.999 mm, + 0.7999" or + 0.07999"

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 115 E.4.84
2.11.3.4 X PROGRAM
------ NO.
Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 814
I/P 1 1 1
11111/"0" transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the

2 bytes for external data input (e.g. 1234)
transfer into the program number store is
initiated.
1'0"/111" transition: No transfer
2)
k PROGRAMNO. - 2onr-

data input
Program number
store
Application notes:
Using the signal % PROGRAMNO., one program (e.g. $1234) from

several which constitute a production sequence can be selected
by the control when in the reset state for the operating mode
(base state for automatic or automatic search).
Any existing word in the program number store will be overwritten.
1
2 BYTES FOR
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT H G F E D C B A
_-
Program no. 80 40 20 lo 8 4 2 1
.-.- -. -.---
--
2 BYTES FOR
EXTEFNAL DATA INPUT Q P 0 N M L K I
Program no. 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100
max. representation: 9999

1
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 116 E.4.84
2.11.3.5 f FEED WOBD81,2

I/P * 2 2 2 2 2 2
'1111/110" transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the

2 bytes for external data input transfer to
the store is effected.
11011/1111'transition: No transfer
Example: Fl4000
K FEED WORDS1,2

data input
Buffer store
Feed word store
Application notes:
The first lllll/lVO1l transition of the signal H FEED WORDeffects

transfer of the first part of the F word ( here 4000) from the 2
bytes for external data input into a buffer store. The second
11111/(1011
transition initiates addition of the second part of the
F word ( here 10000) from the 2 bytes for external data input to
the first part of the F word. The result of this addition is
filed in the feed word store and any word already there is over-
written. Only now is the feed word valid.
Both the first and second part of the F word from the 2 bytes
for external data input must be transferred to the store even
when one part does not hold any information.
The external feed value is cancelled by reset or by assigning
a new value via program. The internal value is the again valid.
\
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 117 E.4.84
The second part of the F word contains, in addition to any feed

word, the value of the feedrate factor (1 : 100) and the feedrate
dimension ( mm/min; mm/rev.)

DATA INPUT
Feed word 1
(1st part of F word) / 80 140 / 20
2 BYTES FOR EXTERNAL -

DATA INPUT Q P 0 N M L K I
Feed word 1
(1st part of F word) 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100
1
2 BYTESFOR EXTERNAL
DATA INPUT I Q IpI0 N M L K I
Feed word 2
(2nd part of F word) pa %$- 01 $y
X X X X X x factor '3%
i 1:lOO
Extension of the setting-up modes for large machines using interface
section, e.g. external call-up of cycles (circle milling).
In the setting-up modes multiplication of the feedrate reduction

1: 100 (2.9.l2), feedrate factor 1 : 100 (2.11.35)and feedrate
override switch_b6.6) results. The lowest possible feedrate is
approx. 50 x 10 mm/min.
System 8 (~/2) 2 - 118
E.4.84
2.11.3.6 K SPINDLE SPEED COMMANDVALUE

UP 1 1 1 1 - 1
11111/1100transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the

2 bytes for external data input (e.g.
4000 rev/min) transfer into the spindle
speed store is effected.
11011/111"transition: No transfer
K SPINDLE SPEED
COMMANDVALUE
*lT[gJ-
+ 20ra
2 bytes for external //////
data input ///A 4m /4
I;
Spindle speed /////A[ 4000
store
Application notes:
Any word already in the spindle speed store is overwritten.
2.BYTF.S FOR EXTERNAL

DATA IIWJT H G F E D C B A
80 40 20 IO 8 4 2 I
l;=E;E;mma - Q P 0 ' N M L K I.,
8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 loo
max. representation: 9999 RPM 01: 999.9 RPM

The PC can supply the NC with a spindle speed wheii changing gear. The
direction S- rotation (*SPINDLE DIRECTION CW) then the spindle speed value,
must be provided in this order otherwise the spindle can accelerate in the
wrong direction.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 119 E.4.84
2.11.3.7 B R PARAMETERWORDS1,2,3
I,p 1 8; Sprin; 8T Sprin; 8~ 8:~ 8; 8:
11111/11011
transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the
2 bytes for external data input, transfer
into the store is effected.
0011/11y1 transition: No transfer

EXAMPLE : ,RSO = - 23780,543
KRPARAMEXER *8'ms 2C%S-

WORDS 1,2,3 I I
1); 3) II I
r20ms+j I
2 bytes for external Y///I 0,543 //1 3780 y//~-20000 v
data input II II II
II ;i
I I I I
Buffer store
ji
R parameter // / // / / / /// //////I -23780.543
store RSO
Application notes :
The first 11111/11011
transition of the signal % R PARAMETEReffects
transfer of the first part of the R word (here O-5@) from the 2
bytes for external data input into a buffer store. The comma is
represented by EHEX (as shown in the 1st part of the R word with 4
bits, N, 0, P and 4). The second "1"/1~011 transition adds the 2nd part of
the R word (as shown 3780) from the 2nd byte of external data input
to the first part of the R word. The result of the addition is stored in
a buffer overwriting the old value. The third Yl'*/'*O" transition adds the
3rd part of the R word (as shown - 20000) from the 2nd byte of external
data input to sum of the first and second parts of the R word.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 120 E.4.84
The result of these additions is defined in parameter R80, thus

overwriting any value already stored in R80. At this point of
time, the R parameter is valid. All three parts of the R word for
the 2 bytes of external data input must be transferred to the
store, even if one part of the R word contains no information
(e.g. 3rd part).
The following table applies to the example R80 = -23780.543
I-
2BYTES FOR EXTERNAL
DATA INPUT I H I G F E D C ,B A
+
R parameter
(1st part
Bit combination
word 1
of R word)
I I 0,08
0 1
0,04
1
0,02
0
0,Ol
0
0,0080,004
0 0
0,002
1
0,001
1
I

DATA IN-PUT Q P 0 N M L K I
R parameter word 1 II 1 " 111 II II 1 II " 0"
(1st part of R word) comma 0,8 0,4 0,2 0,l
Bit combination 1 1 1 0 0 10 1

DATA INPUT H G F E D C B A
R parameter
(2nd part of word 2
R word) 80 40 20 10 8 '4 2 1
Bit 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2 BYm FOR EXTERNAL

DATA INPUT Q P 0 .N M L K I
R parameter word 2
(2nd part of R word) 8000 4000 2000 1000 800 400 200 100
Y
Bit combination 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 121 E.4.84
2 BYTESFOR EXTERNAL
DATA INPUT H G F E D C B A
4.
R parameter word 3 0 0 0 sign . 8000 4000 2000 IOOO
(3ti part of R word)
Bit combihation 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

DATA INPUT Q PON M L K I
R parameter word 3
(3rd part of Rword) NO MEANING
Bit combination
Representation: +_ 99999999. to -I .99999999

The comma can be defined in the lst, 2nd or 3rd
part of the R value with 4 bit of EHEX.
In the 3rd part of the R value, bit E represents
the sign. Bits F, G and H must be "0".
In order to ensure a safe R-parameter transfer to the NC, the

following programming technique is recommended:
N17 M84 LF (PC takes off READ ENABLE, e.g. by M84

and transfers the R-parameter values
into R80. The READ ENABLE is set again
following the completion of the R-parameter
transfer)
N71 G04 F... LF (The dwell time input is to be bigger than
1.2 times of the max. PC cycle time)
N72 L999 LF (Intermediate storage clearing)
N73 R79 0 R80 LF (NC stores R79 with "@" and transfers the
value of R80 into R79).
1..
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 1.22 E.4.84
2.11.3.8 3 SYNCHRONOUSAXIS TRAVERSE @NC)
I 8T Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N 8M

I/d- - 1 - --
11111/11011
transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the
2 bytes for external data input, transfer
into the store is effected.
11011/1111'transition: No transfer
X SYNCHRONOUSAXIS TRAVERSE
~T-[g?

/// / //I w///o e l
data input
Store
Application notes:
With the "1'1/1'0" transition of the signal % SYNCHRONOUSAXIS TRAVERSE
the transfer of the information from the 2 bytes for external data
input into the store is effected. Any existing word in the store
is overwritten.

l
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 123 E.4.84
Using the 6 bits 1 - 6 in the first byte,up to 6

axis pairs can be selected for synchronous axis traverse. The axes
are designated by machine parameters. By combining the bits the
following are possible: 4 twin axes
2 triplet axes
2 quadruplet axes
The second byte defines whether the selected pair of axes traverse
in the same or opposite direction.

DATA 1KW.C H G F E D C B A
Synchronous axis X ,X 6. 5. 4. 3. 2. 1.
traverse Axis pair
-----
DATA INPUT Q P 0 N M L K I
--.
Synchronous axis X X 5) t) 2) -r-j 2) 2)
. traverse
A A
1 = same direction; 0 = opposite directions
System 8 (N/Z)
2 - 124 E.4.84
2.11.3.9 * REFERENCE (DATUM) POINT NO. 1 V3M, Sprint 8M, 8MC)
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ ,-8M

1 1 1" l
I/p I* 1*
llllV/llO1l transition: After the appearance of a valid word in the 2

bytes for external data input (e.g. 7) transfer
into the datum point store is effected.
Dynamic transition is required, no static signal,
and no additional strobe.
llO1t/llltl transition: No transfer
2)
Z DATUM POINT NO. 1 - 20nn-
1) L- 3) -
+ 2088
2 bytes for external ??visl. 7 Y/I/////
data.input I'
II
Datum point no.

store
Application notes:
An existing word in the datum point number store will be overwritten.
2 BYTES FOREXTERNAb H 0 F E D 0 B A
DATA INPUT
yt additional
X X X X 8 4 2 l-
Reference point.
TE N300
2 BYTESFOREXTERNAD Q p o N M D E D
DATA INPUT
Datum point no meaning
number@
*Software 02 or later
Svstem 8 (N/2) 2 - 125 E.4.84
l
2.11.3.10 INTERFACE ALARM
% ---w-m---
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 8~4~ 8~ 8M

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
111('/11011transition: After the 7 bit ASCII code transfer of

the 2 bytes for external data input the
transferred characters are shown as
interface section alarm signals on the
SINUMERIK display (line 1, sections 26,27).
11011/11111
transition: No display of interface alarms
l
K INTERFACE
ALARM

data input
SINUMERIK
Display-Line 1 I I 1 I/P 1 O/P]
Section 26 21
Application notes:
Using the signal K INTERFACE ALARM in any operating mode.
interface alarms can be shown on line 1 of the SINUMERIK display.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 126 E.4.84
The interface alarms consist of two alpha-numeric characters

generated in the interface section (e.g. LR = Limit switch Leached) and
can be used as direct or coded information.
Tha two interface alarm fields, 26 and 27, are cancelled with
ASC II = 2020Hex (ASC II OOOO,,is @Q).
2 BYTES FOR EXTERNAZl

DATA INPUT H G F E D C B,A
IINTERFACE ALARM1 7 Bit ASCII - Code

DATA IN-PUT Q P 0 N M
INTERFACE ALARM 7 Bit ASCII - Code

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 127 E.4.84
2.11.4 *R-PARAMETER
----------- READ/STORE (block transfer via handshake) (01)
In order to obtain handshake-controlled R-PARAMETER READ/STORE,

machine data N425.4 "programmable interface existant" must
be set.
Application note:
1.) The following informations must be provided prior to the
transfer request (l/O-transition of the signal *R-PARAMETER
READ/STORE):
- Number of parameters to be transferred in flag byte
MB 18 bit g to 5, binary coded
- Data module no. in flag byte 19, binary coded
- Data word no. in flag byte 20, binary coded
- R-parameter no. when reading (PC from NC) or R-para-
meter no. and its value when storing (PC to NC)
in the PC data section.
All this
information is to be sustained until the
" 0 " / " 1 " -transition is effected.
hl. -- Addk-. Bit. - Number I

PC-r1aci 7 6 5 4 I 2 1 0
dant. _ _ _ _
umb*r
PC-Addr .
l Modiftcntlon ~ianala for data tran%fsr Datum
Al5
---- R-param.- R-paTam.- i+param.- R-pF..TMI. 'R-param, y&- point r&jLg;;;; "p
word 3 word 2 word 7 read
n17. __ I2.Ll.3-10 '12."..91-- r2"l~*Sl
-- - -- (2,11.3.7) 12L?1LL.7L-(211.1.7?_It~OZO_ __ _ _
2211. II II
11 Number of R-p..rameters PC to NC/PC from NC (max. 631

I Al6 I I I I Axis - codina 12.11.2) I
TE ---- 7 E
111s.
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ - -
m12. +
Data module no, 113OW. 15OAJ absolute address (150 51
1st byte for external data Input 12.11.11
Data module no. (llOW, 15OAJ dbsolute address 1150 SI

---Al8 2nd byte for external data input 12.11.11
-
N4 P 0 N n L I( I
PQO. 0
___________-- -- --------.------- -----
EE14.
PC data DIO= ST, in-prosera look ahead

Al9 current control
output C"IF.Qr Spr.ST- 4a41ng
: - --- proaram mftw~rs act1va
st*tus via 2nd rs..t
- MO1
- - - pointer V.24 (DNC)
EEOl
Axes: e.g. bN/8M/Sprint 8M/0MC: @ = X, @ = Y, @ = Z

BT/sprint BT: 0 =x,@ =z
1) (2.9.13.2) REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGE DELAY (8N only)

2) (2.10.1) *POSITION GAIN SWITCHOVER (8N only)
3) (2.11.4) *R-PARAMETER READ/STORE
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 128 E.4.84
2.) The flags 17.3 and 17.4 must be reset by the PC

(l/@-transition);
e.g. UN MX.Y Key
R MZ.V FL-HM
U MX.Y Key
UN MZ.V FL-HM
S MZ.V FL-HM
R M 17.3 * R-PARAMETER READ (PC from NC)
Following the end of parameter transfer,the respective flags
are set back by the NC ("O"/"1"-transition)
3.) It is possible to transfer up to 63 R-parameter (one

parameter every 10 ms).
4.) At least 20 ms must elapse between the last O/l and the
next l/O transition.
5.) NC-alarm 522 is displayed, if
- The data module No. specified is fl
- The data module No. specified doesn't exist in the
PC-programm
- The capacity of the data module in the PC-programm is
exceeded
- The number of R-parameters to be transferred is @
2.11.4.1 * R-PARAMETER
----------------- READ IPC from NC* Ml7
-----,,,-,L,,,,'- 31
8~ Sprint 8T 8~ Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N

11 1 1 '1 1 1
l/O-transition: Once the following information:

- number of R-parameters to be transferred
- the data module No. (DB No.)
- the data word No. (DW No.)
- and the R-parameter number
is specified by the PC, the NC will pick up a
R-parameter No. every 10 ms , and transfer the
corresponding value into the PC data section.
This is repeated, until every parameter
is transferred (read from the PC).
O/l-transition: Is set by the NC, once all the parameter data
called for are transferred into the PC data
section.
3ystern 3 (N/2) 2 - 129 E.4.84
Example : readinq of 3 R-parameters

R85 = - 23456,789; R24 = - 12345667, ; R96 = + ,24680135
10 ms- cycle
*R-PARAMETER READ
(PC from NC; M17.3)
Number of R-parameters
(MB18 Bit 0 - 5) i I I
DB-no.
(MB191
132
I I I
DW-no.
(MB20) 5
I I I
R-par.-no. in R85, R24, R96

PC data sectior
(z.B. DB132) I I
NC transfers R-par.-
value to PC
08132 High-Byte Low-Byte
/
DW 4 and so on
DW 5 /
DW 6
31011ll 10,1,0,0 0 1 0 1 lO,l,l 10
DW 7 R-par.-no. 85
I10101010111011 O O0 ~lOlOl1lo
DW 8
I I
DW 9
I I
R-par.-no. 24
DWlD
01Oll lOlOll 1010 I
DWll
I I
DW12
I I
R-par.-no. 96
DW13
1 ,o,o Illotl 11 ,ol I 1
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 130
E.4.84
2.11.4.2 * R-PARAMETER
------------------ STORE IPC to NC1
--------
8~ Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

11 1 1 1 1 1
l/($-transition: Once the following information:

- number of R-parameters to be transferred,
- the data module No. (DB No.),
- the data word No. (DW No.),
- the R-parameter No. and value
is specified, the NC reads from the PC data
section a parameter No. and its value and transfers
them into the NC. This is repeated every 10 ms
until every single parameter and its value is stored
in the NC.
@/l-transition: Is set by the NC following the transfer of all
parameters.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 131 E.4.84
l storing of 3 R-parameters
Example:
R8? = - 23456,789; R24 = - 12345667, ;R96 = + ,24680135
10 ms-cycle
*R-PARAMETER STORE
(PC to NC; M17.4)
Number of R-par.
(MB18 Bit 0 - 5)
DB-No.
I I I
(MB19)
DW-No. I I I
(MB20)
I I I
R-par.-no. and R85, R24, R96
value in PC data I I
section i I
(e.g. DB123)
NC transfers R-par.- NC - data - buffer

value to NC
08132 High-Byte Low-Byte
l 76543210 I 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bll
DW 4
DW 5
DW 6
DW 7 R-par.-no. 85
DW 8
DW 9 2 3
0 1011 10 lo IO 11 11
DWlO
R-par.-no. 24
0~0~1~0~0~1~0~0
l DWll
DW12
0,01: 101011~10
DW13 R-par.-no. 96
11010 1llOtl 11 IO
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 132
Application note:
Initiated by a l/g-transition of the signal * R-PARAMETER STORE,
(PC to NC, M17.4), the NC picks up the information offered in flag
byte MB 18, Bit g to 5, - number of R-parameter, (e.g. 5),
binary coded.
Then it calculates the start address in the PC-data section
rd data word (e.g. DW 7)
and reads first from the high byte of the 3
the R-parameter No. (e.g. 85).
Then it transfers the corresponding R-parameter value from the
PC into the NC data buffer: (e.g. -23456,789).
This is repeated every 10 ms until every single parameter
and its value is transferred. (Stored in the NC).
After the transfer of all parameters to be stored, the signal
* R-PARAMETER STORE is cancelled by the NC.
PC-data section:
DL DR
High-Byte Low-Byte
DWn
DWntl
DWn+2
maximum value: 2 99 999 999, to 2 ,999 999 99

The R-parameter value is stored BCD-coded in the
decades PJ to 8, the decimal point as EHex (4 Bits).
The sign is memorized in DWn+2, Bit 4 (in DR).
I'+" = 1rOtv ; "-I' = "lfv. Bit 5,6,7 are $J.
In DWnc2, DL, the PC stores BCD-coded the
R-parameter No.
System El (N/2) 2 - 133 E.4.84
l 2.12 Inhibit siqnals PC-NC
2.12.1 AXES INHIBIT

2 2 4 10 3 4
I/P
"If1 signal: No analogue command value is output to the respective

axis drive (Axis inhibit) I The servo loop remains closed
~Yl" signal: Normal state
Application notes:
The inhibited axis receives no drive command
During commissioning in order to plot path of 2 axes.

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 134 E.4.84
2.12.2 X ------m----m-----
INHIBIT AUXILLARY FUNCTION OUTPUT
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 814~ 8N 6M
I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
ttO" signal: Disable the S&H and M function output
V" signal: Auxillary function output

System 8 (N/.2) 2 - 135 E.4.84
2.13 Datatransfer DNC (02)

The DNC-function and its associated signals and flags at
the NC/PC interface are activated by machine daka.
2.13.1 INFORMATION STORED IN I-BUFFER
----------------------------------- (Flag -m-B--
45.6)

0 I 1 1 1 1 1 1
"I"-signal: With data module and data word No. for the I-buffer
(Flag byte 46, 47) specified and the signal
I-BUFFER NOT CLEAR a logic 'IO", the NC transfers its
data into the PC-data section,and sets the flag when
finished, to "I".
"0"-signal: The PC resets the flag to $?J, once it has processed
the above data.
2.13.2 I-BUFFER NOT CLEAR (Flag ---B-M
Y---------------------- 45.0)
I 8~ Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

0 1 1 1 1 1 1
I
"I"-signal: The NC will set this flag to "I", in case the data
module No. for the I-buffer in Flagbyte 46 is
specified QI.
0 "OH-signal: The PC resets this flag to 0, following the
elimination of the initial problem!
2.13.3 a) DATA MODULE NO. FOR I-BUFFER
----------------------------- IMB
----- 461
I 8T Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

I 8 8 8 8 8 8
The PC stores the"data module No. for the I-buffer"

dualcoded into Byte 46, prior to every transfer of data.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 136 E.4.84
b) DATA WORD NO. FOR I-BUFFER

--------------------------- IMB
--s-m471
I 8T Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

I I 8 8 8 8 8 8
The PC stores the data word No. for the I-buffer binary coded
into Byte 47, prior to every transfer of data.
2.13.4 TRANSFER DATA FROM O-BUFFER
------------------------------------ (M 45.7)
I 8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
II 1 1 1 1 1
,I 1 II -signal: With data module No. and data word No. for the O-buffer
(flag byte 48, 49) specified, "@" status of "O-BUFFER
NOT CLEAR", and the data to be transferred stored in
O-buffer, the flag 45.7 is set to "I" by the PC.
V1'- signal: The NC resets flag 45.7 to 8 following the transfer

of the data from the O-buffer.
2.13.5 O-BUFFER
------------------ NOT CLEAR (flag 45.1)
OI I 1 1 1 1 1
"1"-signal: The signal is set by the NC, if

- the data module No. for O-buffer in flag byte 48
is specified Q).
- the length of the data module in the PC data section
is insufficient.
"0 "-signal: The PC resets this flag to @, following the elimination

of the initial problem.
2.13.6 a) -----------------------------
DATA MODULE NO. FOR O-BUFFER IMB
------48)
I 8~ Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M 8MC 8N
The PC stores the data module No. for the O-buffer binary code' a
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 137 E.4.84
b) --------------------------
DATA WORD NO. FOR O-BUFFER (q'!..av bvte 49)
I 8~ Sprint 8T 8M 'Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N

8 8 8 8 8
The PC stores the data word No. for the O-buffer *binary coded
2.13.7 DATA TRANSFER IN PROGRESS ,(flac
------------------------- 26.4)
(Only in conjunction with option DNC)
8T Sprint 8T 8~ sprint 8~ ~MC 8~

0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
"@'I- signal: The data exchange NC/DNC is either completed or not yet
activated. The NC display however may already show
"data transfer NC/DNC".
"I"-signal: The data exchange NC/DNC is in progress, initiated by
either the NC or the DNC - host computer with a
telegram RU??
The bottom line of the NC display reads "Control, in Action'.
The data exchange may be stopped by the operator with
"RESET" buttom only.
During data exchange no PC information can be sent to
the DNC-host terminal.
a 2.13.8 DNC ACTIVE

----- (flag 45.3)

0 1 1 1 1 1 1
"O"-signal: No DNC mode is selected. The setting data N26,

Bit 2 is "45".
"1''-signal: DNC mode is preselected. The setting data N26,
Bit 2 is "I". The interface'1 of the NC is blocked.
a
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 138 E.4.84
2.13.9 DNC LINK IS INTERRUPTED

----------------------- (M45.2)
0 1 1 1 1 1 1
"O"-signal: The DNC-Communication runs troublefree.

"I"-signal: - The DNC host terminal is not clear to receive or
transmit data and has sent the telegram TNP
($zansmission Not Possible)
- Following an attempted communication by the NC,
the DNC host terminal failed to respond by a telegram
DLE@ or DLEI.
- Time check has been tripped.
Data module DB
H-Byte L-Byte
Synchronisation pattern
70 70
module
identification I Module no. I
Module head
(5 words) &identification I Bibl.-no. (edition)
I
fizGy+ Bibl.-no. (variant and current no.)
DW0 I Length
+
1
with data:
1st character in high byte
2nd character in low byte
or
r --_- --------------- c -a
max. 60
words
DW62 Data
63 03 2 El-x I 1
e.g. DNC -- NC/PC: Initiation of transfer with identification
Ident.-no.: 1st 2nd 3rd 4th character

P R T D
Recognition of end via ident.-no.

System 8 (N/2) 2 - 139 E.4.84
2.14.1 PC-DATA OUTPUT VIA

----------------------------------------------------- 2nd V.24 SERIAL INTERFACE (M 01.4)
(To be activated by machine data)

I
II 1 1 1 1
"I"-signal: The PC data output is activated, e.g. to record gaging

results via printer or puncher. The 1 is' V. 24
interchange is now blocked.
"O"-signal: Above Output-mode is not requested, both V.24
interchanges are available to normal use.
Application note:
Data module and data word number, or with AG 15OS, the absolute
address, must be stored by the PC in flag byte 48 and 49.
The PC also stores the data to be output into the data module
location indicated before and requests data transfer by setting
the signal "TRANSFER INFORMATION FROM 0 (OUTPUT)-BUFFER",
(flag 45.7) to 'I". With the requested data transfer completed,
the NC resets the flag 45.7 to @. (see also 2.4 to 2.6)
2.14.2 NC-ALARM (M 26.7)
-w-s------------

0 I 1 1 1 1 1 1
"I"-signal: In event of NC-Alarm

"O"-signal: An alarm has been cancelled or none has occoured.
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 140
2.14.2.1 * READ
-------------- NC-ALARM JPC
----------from NC, --------
M 16.7)
I 8~ Sprint 8~ 8~ Sprint 8M 8MC 8N

II 1 1 1 1 1 1
l/O-transition: The NC transfers up to 12 NC alarm-numbers

(BCD-coded) in ascending sequence into the PC
data section, defined before by data module
and data word number.
O/l-transition: Is set by the NC following the completed transfer
of all it's alarms into the PC data section.
Application note:
1) Prior to the time of request (l/O-transition), the following
information is to be offered by the PC:
- Data modul-No. in MEll9, binary coded
- Data word-No. in MB 20, binary coded and held available
until @/l-transition of *READ NC ALARM is set.
DB...
High-Byte Low-Byte
DW-No. x , IO2 1 IO', loo NC alarm-No.
DW-No.+1
Sytem 8 (N/2) 2 - 141 E.4.84
I I I I I I I I
I 13, number of R-param.t.rs PC to NC/PC from NC Imax. 63) I

Al6 Axis cedlna (2.11.2)
3l-
--mm
F E n
Ill& __ ______ _- ------
Lw2. -I
Data module no. (13OW, 150 A), absolute address 1150 SI

Al7 1st byte for external data input (2.11.1)
Data module no. (130 W, 150 Al, absolute addreer (150 5)

A16 2nd byre for external data input
--- -
Axes e.q. BN/BM/Sprint 0M/8MC: @ = X,@ = Y,@ = 2

BT/Sprint 0T a- x,@ -2
1) (2.9.13.2) REQUEST FOR BLOCK CHANGE DELAY

2) (2.10.1) *KV SWITCHOVER (EN only)
3) (2.11.4) *R PARAMETER READ/STORE
2) The flag is reset by the PC once

16.7
(dynamic
transition l/Q));
e.g. UN MX.Y - Key
R MZ.V FL-HM
U MX-Y - Key
UN MZ.V FL-HM
S MZ.V FL-HM
R M16.7 * READ NC-ALARM (PC from NC)
Following the transfer of all the current NC-alarm-No.,
the NC sets back the flag 16.7 by O/l transition.
3) Up to 12 NC alarm No. at a time can be transferred.
4) Between the last O/l and the next l/O-transition a minimum of
20 ms are required.
5) NC-alarm 522 is set, if
- the data module No. is defined 'I@",
- the data module No. doesn't exist within the PC-program,
- the length of the data module is insufficient.
System 8 (N/2)
2 - 142
2.14.3 CURRENT PROGRAM-STATUSPOINTER

------------------------------ IPC from
---------- NC, ------
M 1.71
8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M ~MC 8~

I 1 1 1 1 1 1
I
@/l-transition: After the data module no. and data word no.
have been set, the NC transfers the current
program statuspointer information.
l/O-transition: Is set by the NC following the completed
transfer of the statuspointer information
into the PC data, section.
Application note:
DB . . .
7 4 3 0 Bit
H-Byte 10) 1 loL I

DWn Part program no. (e.g. %1234)
L-Byte IO1 loo
I
DWn+l Part program block no.

e. q.Nl450)
DWnt2 1st UP number (e.g. ~123)
DWnt3 1st UP repeat no. (e.g.15)
DWn+4 1st UP block no. (e.g. N2680)
DWntS 2nd UP number

lo1 1 loo I
X X DWnt6 2nd UP repeat no.

lo1 loo
3 2
DWnt7 2nd UP block no.
lo1 I loo
B=l
X lo2
DWnt8 3rd UP number
lo1 loo
X X DWnt9 3rd UP repeat no.

lo1 loo
lo3 I 102
DWntlO 3rd UP block no.
E-E-i DWntll
current
V
0001
-
8 1

I X I II II . nesting depth 88:: z :

DWntl2
DWrL+13
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 143 E.4.84
2.14.4 DI O-CURSOR RESET IPC

-----------------I to NC, -----m
m--w---- M I.31

I 1 1 1 1 1 1
l-signal: The NC resets the DI O-Cursor to Input by lst V.24

interface.
g-signal: NC confirms RESET-status of DI O-Cursor to the PC.
2.14.5 WLPC-Monitoring
------------
Activated by machine data N463.3 "programmable interface
existant". In conjunction with bus-linked AG S5-150 S
to monitor operation of both, NC and PC.
2.14.5.1 PC-MONITORING
--------------------- (M 0.6)
8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N

0 1 1 1 1 1 1
O/l-transition: The signal is set to "1" by the NC if the
preset time interval (machine data N344,
10 to 1270 ms) has elapsed, provided the signal
signal has before been set to fl by the PC.
l/@-transition: The signal is set to "0" by the PC within

the preset elapse time interval
Application note:
If this signal is not set to 0 by the PC within the defined
elapse time, (handshake principle), the NC cancels "NC-READY 2",
(Hardware signal), causing shut down of machine operations.
The LED IPC at the PCB MS 700 is lit.
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 144 E.4.84
2.14.5.2 NC MONITORING
--------------------- (M 0.7)

I I 1 1 1 1 1 1
O/l-transition: The signal is set to "1" by the PC, following
a previous reset to Q, by the NC.
An alarm bit is set by the PC, should the NC
fail to reset the signal.
l/O-transition: The NC resets the signal to @ every IO ms.
2.14.6 TOUCH PROBE CONTACT 1M

-------------------- ,,-,I-27 71
8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M 8Mc 8~

0 1 1 1 1 1 1
II
1 II
-signal: Contact closed; touch probe mechanically engaged
(+24V at input X208.3 of the measuring circuit
module MS 250 respectively X304.4 of MS 301).
The actual position of the first moving axis
is read and stored in R94.
The axis rest value is cancelled,
The delay time for registration of actual position
varies statistically from 0 to 40 psek.
Consequently, the NC generates "rest value reset".
Again, there is a delay of up to 12 ms
The NC responds with command voltage to QI by
ramp-function, hence the drive brakes on its current
limit, the following error is reduced to Q).
"O"-signal: Contact open, touch probe mechanically not engaged.
Application note:
With TESTING (employing N6, A6, bit 7), you can try,
whether.the touch probe functions correctly
(input x208.3 at MS250).
System 8 (N/2) 2 - 145 E.4.84
2.14.7 ETLSPRINT 8T SOFTWARE (M 26.51

--------------------------
"I"-signal: Following a request by PC (M 01.2 = "I")

the NC confirms switchover into 8T/Sprint8T
Software status (turning operation).
"O"-signal: Software status is of Sprint 8~ (milling operation)
2.14.8 8TISPRINT 8T SOFTWARE 1M
------------------- 01.21
---m-w
0 8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8~ 8MC 8N

I 1 1 1
"I"-signal: 8T/Sprint 8T Software status is preselected

by PC (Turning operation)
"O"-signal: Software status Sprint 8M is preselected by PC
(Milling operation, c-axis)
Application note:
The NC must be in RESET-condition, in order to respond to
above signals.
a 2.14.9 IN-PROCESS GAGING (M Ol.lL

-------------------------
8~ Sprint 8T 8M Sprint 8M ~MC 8N

I 1 1 1 1 1 -
"I"-signal: The "fast" touch probe input becomes sensitiv, as
preparation for "In process gaging."
" PI" - signal: The "fast" touch probe input is not active. The sensor
input (MS 250, X208.3 resp. MS301, X304.4), when set?,
is not responded to by the NC.
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
2 - 146
2.15.1 NC in RESET STATE

------m-m (M45.5)

O/PI 1 1 1 1 1 -
II 1 II -signal: NC in RESET STATE
"O"-signal: NC not in RESET STATE
Application note:
This signal is only output with option DNC, i.e. the machine
data for the DNC and the setting data N26, SE2/bit 2 = 1
must be set.
2.15.2 Output of G-Code G94 to G97

-------------a (M27.5/6)
I8T Sprint 8~ 8M Sprint 8M ~MC 8~
2 2 2 2 2
These signals are not restricted to an option and therefore

continually active. The G-functions G94/G95, G96, G97 are
coded by the NC and output to the PC via the flags M27.5 and
M27.6.
G94 G95 G96 G97
M27.5 0 0 0 1
M27.6 0 0 1 0
System 8 (N/2) 3-1 ~.4.84
3. Vlains IIN" Module Description
One screened cable (0.1E2) may be used commonly for the signals
SPINDLE STOP, SPINDLE START, FEED HOLD, FEED ENABLE, OPERATION
LOCK and CYCLE START.
3.1 EMERGENCYSTOP - separate cable, 4 signals -
E. STOP BUTTON (strike switch with twist reset) on the Mains ON

module.
Max. switching voltage 220V.
Connection directly to EMERGENCY STOP button using screened cable.
The screen must be connected to the front plate casing (see mounting
sketch).
System 8 (N/2) 3-2 E.4.84
Application Note:
Used in the E. STOP circuit for the machine.
E-v--
i I
2
-----
1
1.3'4
b
1
4
-L- -2
E.STOP button
connect cable to button
,, Earthing screw M5
logic components
Cable to machine
System 8 (~/2; 3 -3 E.4.84
3.2 SPINDLE OFF
SPINDLE ON (not for EIN) - 2 signals -
The switching signals spindle off r-l0- and spindle on El on

the Mains ON module are transferred as independent, logic
signals to the interface control.
Application notes:
Using the SPINDLE OFF signal the interface control generates the
input signal SPINDLE STOP (2.10.4). The spindle stop
condition is removed by SPINDLE ON,
Additional, external combinations of buttons can be
arranged to operate in parallel with the main buttons.
Spindle OFF Spindle ON

-l-4
Solder cable to Solder cable to

button button
it
,, Earthing screw Mfj =---- --- ---- Earthing screw M5
logic components --- --- --3--+ logic components
Cable to interface Cable to interface

control control
System 8 (N/2) 3 -4 E.4.84
3.3 FEEDHOLD
FEED START - 2 signals -
The switching signals feed hold on the

c0 and feed start
Mains ON module are transferred as independent, logic signals to
the interface control.
X GENERAL FEED ENABLE (2.9.2)
3 MOTION COMMAND(e.g. +X)

(2.4.2) il! I
FEED HOLD
FEED START
pressed
Feed hold lamp lights
Application notes:
Using the signal FEED START the interface control generates the
input signal X GENERALFEED ENABIJZ. This signal is cancelled on
output of FmD HOLD.
Additional, external combinations of buttons can be arranged to
operate in parallel with the main buttons.
FEED HOLD FEED ENABLE
Solder cable to switch Solder cable to switch

r
._------------ -l, M5 earth screw M5 earth screw

.------------ on logic rack on logic rack
To interfaCE To interface
System 8 (N/Z) 3-5 E.4.84
3.4 NC ON individual cable- 1 signal -
The switching signal NC ON Dl is transferred as an independent,

logic signal to the power supply unit (X1/1,2).
Signal NC ON must be at least 500 ms long, but no 1WW than
2 s.
1 signal: NC on
Solder*cable to switch
M5 earthing screw
on logic rack
To terminal block X1/1.2
3.5 OPERATORLOCK (keyswitch) - 1 signal -
The keyswitch signal operator lock f is transferred as an

LJ
independent, logic signal to the interface control (2.8.2).
"1" signal: The complete operator's panel is switched off
"0" signal: Opera t or's panel not switched off
Operator's lock key switch
Jr Solder cable to switch
I-+ M5 earthing screw

on logic rack
To interface
System 8 (~/2) 3- 6 E.4.84
3.6 START
Start button on the Mains ON module

The switching signal is output as an independent, logic signal.
pressed
START
Start conditions in
interface control
% NC START
(2.7.2)
-1FPROGRAMACTIVE
(2.4.3)
Application notes:
Together with the start conditions a "1" signal generates the
z NC START signal (2.7.2). Additional, external start buttons
can be arranged to operate in parallel with the main start button.
Start
Solder cable to switch

1-
---->----l~ I% earthing screw

on logic rack
To interface
System El (N/2) 4-1 E.4.84
4. Description of the signals NC 4 machine
4.1 NC READY 2
-mm--- (Hardware signal)

O/P -l 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal : Following mains switch on and build-up of voltage

levels
"0" signal: a) After exceeding temperature limit 2 in the

SINUMERIK (fault signal)
b) Actuation of undervoltage monitoring
4 Actuation of overvoltage monitoring
d> Actuation of measuring circuit monitoring
4 Actuation of drive monitoring
f) Actuation of computer monitoring
Mains voltage I
NC READY 2
Fault signal
Application notes:
Exceeding the temperature limit 2 or detection of under voltage,

overvoltage or computer monitoring effects a control switch off, which
cancels all buffer and active stores information.
The control is only ready for operation again when the mains are switched
on.
System El (N/2) 4-2 E.4.84
If the measuring circuit monitoring or drive monitoring is actuated,

the feed drives are braked rapidly to a standstill. The drive monitor
alarm is cleared with the reset push button. The measuring circuit
monitor alarm is cleared by switching the mains on again and therdfore
all stored functions in the buffer and active stores arecancelled.
The signal can be used for the immediate stopping of all movements
influenced by the NC (interrogation of the signal and wiring with
contactor or relay switch) (0 signal).
This signal is through hardware led via the Bus interface to the
PC causing there in case of error (0 signal) the immediate switching
off of all PC output signals (PC to machine).
This function may be modified by start up procedure, so that NC-
outputs are not disabled.
Warning:
The output signal *NC READY 2 can be interrogated in the PC (access
via the software interface NC-PC). It may also be read from the measuring
loop boards MS200 (plug X208, pin 14/15; 8T, Sprint 8T, 8M, Sprint 8M, 8N)
or MS300 (plug X304, pin 14/15; 8MC) )NC READY 2).
This signal, unlike the interface signal *NC READY 2,iis even output
with computer fault.
System 8 (N/2) 4-3 E.4.84
4.2 Feed drives: NC -$ machine
4.2.1 SPEED
--w---w COMMAND

o/p I 2 2 4 12 3 4
Polarity of command signal voltage:
Positive voltage effects traversing in direction of increasing

coordinates PLUS
Negative voltage effects traversing in direction of decreasing

coordinates MINUS
The spindle speed command value is changed in steps by the NC.

If the command voltage is susceptible to noise:
4 apply smoothing to the spindle speed command input
h) change the speed regulator charactxristics (P, I)

or the acceleration (see machine parameters]
4.2.2 3 CONTROLLER
---m----u -INHIBIT

O/P 2 2 4 12 3 4
The axis-dependent controller enable signals (2.9.4) from the

interface control are linked as logic signals in the control
and output to the servo controllers.
0 signal: Pulses to thyristors blocked
"1" signal: Pulses to thyristors enabled

.
System 8 (N/2) 4-4 E.4.84
Machines without mechanical axis clamps must have the controller enable
(2.9.4) signals permanently active (permissible exeption: traversing
onto a limit switch (2.9.7)). Machines with mechanical axis clamps
must have the enable signal to the clamped axis removed for the
duration of clamping.
All EMERGENCYSTOP situations (2.7.1/3.1/5.1.2) or actuation of the

measuring circuit monitoring for a particular axis initiate immediate
stopping of the feed drive with maximum breaking current.
All "O"-signals to the servo controller of the associated axis are
active for 1 ms to 32767 ms after initiation of the braking procedure.
The axes cannot be moved as long as the EMERGENCYSTOP situation
still applies.
Removal of the controller enable signal (2.9.4) to a particular

axis whilst it is in motion is also recognised as E. STOP and
this also initiates immediate stopping of the feed drive for
that axis using maximum braking current. All other axes are
braked normally, 1 ms to 32767 ms after initiation of braking,
the "0" signal to the servo controller of the appropriate axis
( i.e. the axis from which the controller enable has been removed
by the interface control ) becomes active, The other axes can
be traversed again once the braking process is completed.
The braking distance and following error are detected in the

control such that the data store memorises the machine position
after the braking process. It is not necessary to re-synchronise
the axes (return to datum).
* CONTROLLER INHIBIT is active (1 signal) in the follow-up mode (2.9.8)

System El (N/2) 4-S E.4.84
4.3 Main spindle drive
4.3.1 SPEED
----1-w COMMAND

O/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
Direction control of the main spindle by the PC results from the
polarity of the command value voltage with the signal SPINDLE
ROTATIONCOMMANDCLOCKWISE(2.10.3).
The spindle speed command is changed in steps by the NC. If the command
voltage is susceptible to noise:
4 apply smoothing to the spindle speed command input
b) Change the speed regulator characteristics (P, I)
or the acceleration (see machine parameters)
4.3.2 k CONTROLLER
-----mm--- DISABLE
I 8T Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 8fi

O/P I ' 1
0 s ignal : a) Occurs in fault condition after controlled

deceleration to speed S = O,(EM Stop) after a defined dwell
( parameter)
b) occurs with Ml9 after spindle in position
(2.6.1$ and spindle stop (2.10.4) active.
c) After switching on the machine
1 s ignal : a) Occurs with enable to main spindle drive,
b) occurs with Ml9 and "0" signal when
SPINDLE= signal (2.10.4) is removed.
System 8 (N/Z) 4-6 E.4.84
4.3.3 X EUNJWNIBBLE
--am- ON &r$yEl-N~
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8N fm

1 -
oh
Permanent Signal 1: On programming M22, M24 Nibble
Pulsed Signal 1 : On programming M25, M26, M27 Punch
The ON-OFF time Point dscision is managed by the control in

conjunction with the Signal NIBBLING BERO (5.1.3)
System 8 (~/2) 5-l E.4.84
Description of the signals machine +NC
Feed drives
VELOCITY
-m----m- CONTROLLER
---w- READY
1 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ 8M

,
I/PI 1 1 1 1 1 1
This input signal monitors the driver circuits for all

axes, (see cable drawings)
a "1" signal: Velocity controller ready for operation
"0" signal: Effects rapid braking of all drives
E the VELOCITY CONTROLLER READYsignal is not used, the

appropriate input must be connected directly to 24 V.
System 8 (N/2] E.4.84
3.1.2 f EMERGENCY
------- STOP

I/P , 1 1 1 1 1 1
This input signal monitors the driver circuits for all axes
"0" signal: Effects rapid braking of all drives using maximum

braking current (interruption of position loop)
Y" signal: Operating state
If the input signal K E. STOP is not used, the appropriate

input must be connected directly to 24 V.
See 2.7.1, 3.2.
5.1.3 * NIBBLING BERO (8N only)

-----Y-------
8~ Spbint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~Mc 8~ 8M

1 -
tlO1l/"llt transition: Start the positioning time measurement for

the first nibble (Determinethe nibble acceleration),
Start axis move for nibbling and punching
V"/ltOt~ transition: Stop the positioning time measurement

Start the data transfer for the next nibble or punch
block.
System 8 (N/2) s-3 E.4.84
0 NIBBLE
-m-w
Data transfer to
l-l l-l 1 rl
working memory 1
i I
Block in working II I
memory N..X..Y..E.. M22 LF ..X..Y..E.. M22LF'N..X..Ee) M20 LF
1st nibble block ibbleblock positioninq
NIBBLING BERO
X208.3
SPEED COMMAND
Feed rate X axis
x202.1
PUNCH/NIBBLE ON
X202. 17/22
-- PUNCH
---
Data transfer to l-l l-l l-l

working memory t
I t \
J I I
I
Block in working ' N..X..Y..E.. M25 LF 1 N..X..Y.. M20
I y;lbx.by$& Mgo$
memory 1 1st pun_ch block 1 1 3rd punch block
I ,
I
NIBBLING BERO \
l X208.3 I ' I
1 +d
@
I
\
SPEED COMNMD I
Feeyd20;yte X axis
- \ 1
', I 9
%
PUNCH/NIBBLE ON 1 2
I I I xv)
X202. 17122 (4.3.2.6)
System 8 (N/2) 5 -4 E.4.84
Application notes:
Between the positive and negative flank of the NIBBLING BERO, the
preparatory function "Et1 programmed nibble distance must be reached
(calculating the nibble acceleration).
5.1.4 Measuring
------a---- probe input
With 8T/Sprint 8T, 8M/Sprint 8M available only in conjunction with
digital measuring system, PCB type MS 250 connector X208/pin 3 .
(the identical input is used for nibble control-proximity switch
signal in case of 8~).
With 8MC, input at connector X304/pin 4 of PCB MS 301.
!J- signal : normal operation
"l"-signal : With flag Mol.1 set (IN PROCESSGAGING), an

input of +24~ (measuring probe activated)
causes immediate registration of the actual
axis position and takeover into R94.
The rest-value of the moving axis is erased
and thus the axis motion stopped (see also
section 2.14.6).
System 8 (N/Z) 5 -5 E.4.84
a 5.2 Handwheel
Operation using the handwheel is only possible in the Jog/Handwheel

mode l-l% . When two handwheels are being used the following axis
designation applies:
Handwheel 1: Axis X (8T/ Sprint 8T)

Axis selector switch position left (8MBprint 8M/8MG)
Handwheel 2: Axis Z (8T/ Sprint 8T)

Axis selector switch position right @M/Sprint 8M/8MC)
a No motion command is output when the handwheel is activated. Therefore,

it is necessary that "feed release" and "controller enable" is
provided continuously.
5.2.1 AUXILIARY
------------------ SIGNAL 1

I/P 1 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal: Axis Z (8T/Sprint 8T)

Axis selector switch position right (8M/Sprint 8M/8MG)
a
"0" signal: Axis X (8T/Sprint 8T)
Axis selector switch position left (8M/Sprint 8M/8MG)
Application note:
Auxiliary signal 1 (slider switch) is only required when a

handwheel is used.
In case both axis selector switches are in the same

position, the "l-signal" is not effectiv, so handpulse
generator is activated only with "O-signal", no pulses
are counted with "l-signal".
a
System 8 (N/2) 5- 6 E.4.84
5.2.2 AUXILIAFtY SIGNAL 2

--mm------

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
Auxiliary signal 2 is not yet assigned
5.203 AUXILIAHY
--------a- SIGNAL 3
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ 819

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
Auxiliary signal 3 is not yet assigned.
5.2.4 @F-

I/p ' 1 1 1 1 1
"1" signal: In the

I ..- operating mode Automatic Dl+ or MD1
Auto a] handwheel operation is also activated
(key switch DRF)
"0" signal: No handwheel operation possible
Application note:
With the control in,the operating mode Automatic El- or MD1
Auto qtwo handwheels activated by a key switch (1 signal)
can be used to set a constant path displacement (minimum
displacement 1~). The displacement is displayed separately
and remains stored even for absolute blocks.
If DRF is not used, this ,signal must be held to TP

System 8 (N/2) 6-1 13.4.84
6. Description of stand& operator's

panel signal
6.1 Block diagram
SIGNAL FLOW DIAGRAM between NC and PC
i NC- operator*s panel

I
I
I
I
I I I I
--m --- ye--m ----

INC.- I IPC, 1 r
PC-
l NC-Software Softwar I
-1 I
I
I
I*)
/1 i i Standard op paml
*--I I
-. I/RI 82 - M100
Vi I
I
I
I
-1 I
I I 1 I
I*: I
I
I Machine panel e-J I
"p'p 4 50 - !I 65
I I I
I 1 I
I EXTENDED VDI in erf;.ce
IP n 02 - M 20
I 3. OP 121 - n 44 I
I
I/P' Input signal (PC -+ NC) *) Flexible operating N425.3 = 1

O/P Ir output signal (NC + PC)
System 8 (N/2) 6-2 E.4.84
When the machine data bit "Flexible operator's panel" is

set, the button and switch output signals (NC 3 PC) from the
standard operator's panel can be modified in the PC program or
registered back in the NC as unchanged input signals (PC -$ NC).
Moreover the PC can give out any sequence of button operations

as input signals PC +? NC. This sequence can be initiated
from one of the unassigned buttons on the operator's panel or
directly from machine operations.
The User's operator panel buttons and displays are only active
when machine parametk Flexible operators panel is set.
When the machine data bit "Flexible operator's panel" is

not set, all button and switch signals from the standard operator's
panel are handled directly from the NC program. The PC is limited
to celling up the display.
System 8 (N/2) 6-3 E.4.84
6.2 Standard operators panel /
All operator's panel element signals such as push buttons, on/off switches
and rotary switches are sent from the PC via the NC/PC interface (See
also the marker designation list PC 4 NC and NC-+ PC chapter 0) to the NC.
Just as every push button has a designated marker for the interface,
the positions of the switches must be marker coded.
6.2.1 Data source 3 position switch

(Mem-Tape-Ext)

I/P 2 2 2 2 2 2
The two connections A and B are assigned as follows;
-L
Data source Data source Data source
Tape External Memory
s
t
A 0 1 0
B 0 0 1
System El (N/2) 6-4 E.4.84
Axis selector switch 1,2 (8M/Sprint 8M, 8MC)

6.2.2
I 8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ ~MC 8~ WI
I/P I - 4
With the control in the setting up mode (BM/Sprint 8M four axes

maximum, ~MC ten axes maximum), the required axis is selected
using the two axis selector switches.
Axis traverse is executed using the direction buttons t and -.
Both buttons are binary coded.
b- 8M
Sprint 8~--~l
8MC/
With 8M/8MC:
Are two handpulse generators installed, and both axis

selector switches are set for the same axis, only the
lSt pulse generator becomes activ.
nd pulse generator are ignored.
The pulses from the 2
System 8 (N/2) 6-5 ' E.4.84
6.2.3 Rapid traverse override switch (only 8M/Sprint 8M, 8MC)

I/P
-
3 3 - 3
The rapid traverse override switch enables the rapid traverse

rate to be altered in stages between 1 and 100%
In the case of the SINUMEKCK 8T, Sprint 8T the rapid traverse

rate can be altered between 0 and 120% using the rapid traverse
override switch , The switch for "Rapid traverse override
' active" must first be actuated.
6.2.4 Feedrate override switch
8~ Sprint 8~ Sprint 8~ 8~c 8~ 8M

I/P 4 4 4 4 4 4
This switch enables the feedrate to be altered in steps between

0 and 120%. The signal combinations are binary coded..
DO 0 0 0.0 0 0 0 11111111
t a
System 8 (N/2) 6 -6 E.4.84
6.2.5 Spindle speed override switch
1 8~ Sprint 8T Sprint 8M ~MC 8~ 8M

I/P I 3 3 3 3 - 3
This switch enables the spindle speed to be altered in steps

between 50 and 12%.
With feedrate in rotational

the spindle speed override
units and constant cutting speed
effects automatic matching of the
a
feed drives. The switch is de-activated in the NC ( 100%
permanently selected) for thread cutting G33.
With Software 02 or later, alternatively by machine data.
The switch can only be used when the control has been extended
for the S analog function.
Application notes:
The spindle speed override switch has no effect on the S word
to the NC --$ PC interface because no gear change can occur
from this switch. The NC processes the spindle speed override
signal only together with the NC activated spindle speed command
value,
During spindle oscillation and orientation using M 19

the spindle speed override switch is de-activated.
System El (N/2) 7-l E.4.84
7. Operator's panel extension

(Customised)
To extend the SINUMERIK operator's panel, a logic module for customer

push buttons and lamps is provided. This includes address decoding logic
and output signal memories.
The customer can customise the front panel with its push buttons and lamps,
connect it to the logic module operators
and then to
panel the
with a flat
bus cable. The logic module input and output signals are defined in a PC
marker area as are the push buttons on the operatorts panel. Processing
the customers specific input and output signals in the PC is therefore
l simplified.
System 8 (N/2) 7-2 E.4.84
7.1 Technical data
Customer push buttons and lamps for the machine control panel can
be bus connected to the NC operator's panel with a max. 2 logic
modules.
Technical data:
Protection : IPOO
Isolated reference voltage: 3ov
Humidity class: F
Weight: 398 kg
Inputs:
Number: 56 non-floating
"0" signal: -2v . ..4.5v
"1" signal: 14v . ..35v
Input resistance: 4,6 Kn
Delay time: Typical 0,5ms
Open input: G "0" signal
outputs:
Number: 0 with 6FC9 331-OHA
28 with 6FC9 331-OJA
56 with 6FC9 331-OKA
The output device is a transistor
(VcE max. = 2V, R, 27.G) at + 24V
"1" output current: max. 70 mA

Lamp rating: max. 0,4 W
"0" output current max. 200 UA
No overcurrent protection
System 8 (N/2) 7-3 ~.4.84
Supply voltage:
sv 2 0,25V/560m/A from the operator's panel

+24V + 4V/300m/A output current from the customerts 24V power
supply to
Plug X506
Faston terminals 6,Bmm
Two logic modules in total can be switched in parallel giving a total

of max 112 inputs and outputs. A bridge defines the input/output addresses
Bridge A - B
see page O-6 / O-7
Bridge B - C
System 8 (N/2) 7 -4 E.4.84
Customers cable plugs X502 - X505
The customer needs to manufacture the cable connecting the logic module and
push buttons. A short cable with twisted pairs is recommended to reduce the
effects of noise.
Max permitted lengths

With twisted paifs 1,500 mm
Single cores 800 mm
The 24V power supply cable is to be manufactured by the customer

Core: LIYCY 2x1.5 mm
Plug: AMP Faston 6,S mm
7.2 Accessories
Two types of flat bus cable are available to connect the logic moduls to the
operator*s panel.
Connecting 1 logic module
6FC9 340-7DA, length 56U mm
Connecting 2 logic modules

6FCg 340-7CA, length 560 mm
The connection between the push buttons and lamps of the machine operator*s
panel and the logic modules is with a flat cable.
Recommended plug for X502 - X505: 6FCg 341-IEP, 50 way
(IO.0 E
System 8 (N/2)
E.4.84
e 7.3 Overview
Operator's
Panel
x401
0
FLAT CABLE
6FC9340-7 DA
6FC9340-7 CA
I
24V MM, 24~ hxt
I x501 A 6 C
- *
6FC9 331-OJA
II
Logic Logic
module 6FC9 331-OKA X50E J module
c l-X506
I
--
INPUTS OUTPUTS INPUTS OUTPUTS
X502 x 503 x504 1 x505 X502 x503 x5041 1x505
l 'Recommended plug
6FC9341-1EP
M can also be
ext
connected to plugs
X504 and X505
System 8 (N/2) 8 -1 E.4.84
8. External position displays
The System 8 operator's panel permits the connection of external

position displays for all machine axee. This requires mounting a
module (see Overview).
8.1 Technical data
Displays: characters 13,5 mm
Ambient temperature r +55Oc

Temperature on the front 5 +45Oc
Temperature rate of change max I,1 K /min
Permitted humidity to class F DIN 40040
a Circulation without aggressive gases
Protection to DIN 40050
Front IP54, Rear IPO
Power supplied from the control logic module MS480
Control logic:
Ambient air and circulation temperature 5+55'C

Temperaturs rate of change max I,1 K/min
Permitted humidity to class F DIN 40040
Circulation without aggressive gases
Protection to DIN 40050, IPO
Power supply 22OV, 50/60Hz

System 8 (N/2,) 8-2 E.4.84
8.2 Codinq the position displays
The position displays for the 1st to 10th axes require coding with
the code switch at the rear of the position display.
IO position code switch settings:
'Axis number Code Switch setting
1 1
2 2
. .
. .
. .
9 9
10 10
8.3 Accessories
The position displays (one/axis) are connected with two flat

bus cables.
The first 4 position displays require the flat bus cable

6FC9 340-7AA
The position displays from 5 upwards (max 10) require the flat
bus cable:
6FC9 340-78A
System 8 (N/2) 8-3 ~.4.84
0 8.4 Overview
----zLt!+ ~_..: ---- - -

r----- -1
x451 .Interface MS450

MS450-
included in367
/ to customer module
/ MS450
Round cable
Use M3Xl~'screws for X451 plug 6 FC9340-3S
7 Control
L
ILI MS480
logic
-
\
\
\
\ \
. -
Mains
L Input 220v
Position
l Display 6FC9350-1AK
-_.-.__
Axis symbol
Flat bus cable

6FC9340-7AB
2 5 axes 2 x 6FC9340-7AB
MS 450 interface with its flat bus cable @wd
control logic MS 480 are selected by an
order number (see technical description)
System 8 (N/2) 0 -4 ~.4.84
8.5 General connection layout of the displays and loqic modules to the operators panel
a
Upto IO external displays and 2 logic modules can be connected to the operator's
panel. The full layout is shown below:
I- Ooerator's panel
1
, MS 401
Position display =fJx451 /'
logic MS450 is part I
of option 367 and
368
-Flat bus cable
6FC9340-7CA (2 logic modules 1

6FC9340-7DA (1 logic module)
Rundkabel
6FC9 340-38.
7 0
x.501
4% X 461
-
Position
6FC9350-1AK
displays
\ logic module
6FC9 331-O..
System 8 (N/2) 9-1 1z.4.84
0 9. Peripherals and SIMATIC S5 accessories
The integrated interface is from the SIMATIC S5 range
Items delivered depend upon the basic contkol purchased.
9.1 Basic control 2 (SINIJMERIK)
CPU 1 6~~5 925-3KA12

0 CPU 2 6ES5 926-3KA12
CPU 3 6~~5 927-3KA12
RAM/EPROM-M&mory 6~~5 350-3KA21
EPROM-Module 4K 6ES5 371-OAA41 (MS 820)
EPROM-Module 8K 6ES5 371-OAA31 (MS 820)
Digital inputs 32 I/P/24V 6ES5 420-3BAll (N60)

Digital outputs 32 o/P./O.5 A, 24V 6ES5 445-3AEll (N65)
Digital outputs 16 O/P./2 A, 24V 6ES5 44b3AEll (N70)
Digital inputs 16 inputs with
collective signal 61~5 432-3BAll (N90)
a Extension
Interface
rack
module 312
6ES5 182-3KBOl
6~~5 312-5AA31
Further information , e.g. dimensions, data and interconnections

is contained in catalogue ST55
System 8 (N/2) 9-2 E.4.84
9.2 Basic control 3 (sINUMERIK)
CPU 6~s5 921-3WAll

EPROM-module 4K 6~s5 371-0~~41 (MS 820)
EPROM-module 8K 6ES5 3?l-OAA31 (MS 820)
RAM/EPROM-Memory 6ES5 350-3KA2 1
Digital inputs 32 I/P ./24 V 6ES5 420-3BAll (N60)

Digital outputs 32 O/P ./24 V, 0,5 A 6ES5 445-3AEll (N65)
Digital outputs 16 O/P .I24 V, 2 A 6ES5 444-3AEll (N70)
Digital inputs 16 I/P ./24 V 61~35 432-3BA11 (N9o)

with collective signal
Extension rack 6ES5 182-3KBOl
ZnterEace module 312 6ES5 312-5AA31
Further information, e.g. dimensions, data and interconnections

is contained in catalogue ST 53
9.3 Accessories
Requirements for programming and commissioning
(not delivered with the SINUMERIK)
RAM memory instructions

SK 6~~5 340-3KAll
or 16K instructions 6~~5 340-3KA21
Programming unit PG 670 6ES5 670-OAA21

Programming unit interface 6~s5 51 I-5AAl2
Interconnection cable (length as required) 6~~5 731-OBFOO
e.g. 5 m long.
see also ST53/ST55
Front plugs and tools are, listed under accessories or in Catalogue ST53
System 8 (N/2) 9 -3 E.4.84
a 9.4 Peripheral module technical data and connection layout
Digital input modules 420-3 Digital input module 431-3/432-3 Digital input modules
420-3 N6l) 432-3 NCjO*
Number of inputs 32 16 (with group signal)

Galvanic isolation no ves
Input voltage (rated value) 24VDC 24VDC
Input voltage corresponding lo

- vsignal -33vto+45v -33 v to + 4.5 v
or open-circuited inpu or open-circuited input
- 1 signal +13vto +33v +13vto +33v
input current 1 signal tvp. 6.5 mA 0.5 mA
Typical delay 3ms 2 ms (can be reduced

to 50 ps)
Max. permissible length of cables
- unshielded 6OOm 600m
- shielded 1000m at 2 msz)
1CCilm 1
Insulation voltage rating:
l - external with respect

tovlX0160
- tested with
lo housing
75VDC
5OOVAC
Current consumption L,, +2 L..
- (5Vside) 15OmA 270 mA
Space requirements 1 I, SPS 1IJ SPS

(1 SPS & 15.24 mm) fr 1 module location Q 1 module location
Weight approx. 0.3 kg 0.3 kg
Dlgltal output modules *SLNUMERIK order number
443-P) N70* 445-3 N65

444-3 DigItal 445-3 Digital
Supply voltage and output module
output current output module
(rated values) 24 V d.c./2 A 24 V d.cJ0.5 A
Number of outputs 16 non-floating 32 non-floating
Supply voltage range2)
min. 20 V d.c. 20 V d.c.
30 V d.c. 30 V d.c.
Range of output currentss)
min. 15 mA 5 mA
a - max. 2 A4) 0.5 A5)
Max. residual current . .
-I @I
at 0 signal 1.5 mA 0.5 mA -4 81
i ::-$@,
Signal level at the -6 a4 9rw
j 1: -1 @I
outputs at . . -9 06
0 signals) 4 V d.c. <3 V d.c. ~ -9 @I t
1 signal) >up -1.6 v >Up -2.5 V 2-0
P-T. -,
Short-circuit protection without electronic
Limitation of the
induced voltage on
circuit interruption to -15v to-15v
Max. permissible length
of leads 100 m 100 m
Switching frequency
resistive load 5100 Hz 6100 Hz
lamps s 11Hz S 11Hz
inductive loada) S 2Hz S 2Hr
Simultaneity factor
at 1 = 55 Co) 50%
Current consumption
Lm + hax
2
on 24 V side with LED 200 mA 600 mA Screen)
without LED 200 mA 600 mA 1) As required
1) As required
on 5 V side 160mA 300 mA 2) L+ common for 4 outputs
Weight approx. 0.3 kg amox. 0.3 kg
a
1) For 46 V d.c.: -66 V to + 5 V for 0 signal. 6) For minimum output loading.

+24 V to +66 V for 1 slgnal. 7) For maximum output loading.
2) Including ripple: max. ripple 15% (U,,) of rated voltage. 6) For rated loading. Higher values are permissible for lower loading.
3) For 1 signal in the permissible supply voltage range. 0) Note the diagram concerning the ambient temperature dependence In the operating
4) 10 W maxlmum lamp load. Instructions.
5) 5 W maximum lamp load. 10) Two modulelocations or slots are required for double-width front panel.
System 8 (N/2) 9-4 E.4.84
9.5 PC-Memory Address Coding

Memory-PCB's for userprogram
Addresses
I EPROM
I
I
I
Number of
words
(instruct i
Variant : A B C D E
Depending on demand, the user can select his program memory

through combination of three memory PCB's (combining max.
two PCB's).
6ES5 340-5AAll = RAM for 8~ instructions

6ES5 340-5AA21 = RAM for 16K instructions
6ES5 350-5AA21 = EPROM for 1 to 16K instructions and
for 4K instructions
The PCB 6ES5 350-5AA21 carries two insert locations for

EPROM modules 370 (with 1, 2, or 4K) or 371 (with 2, 4, or
8K instructions).
System 8 (N/2) 9 -5 E.4.84
When programming with a programming unit PG 670, the user

determines which modules of his PC program are to be stored
into RAM- (AG-memory) or into EPROM.
The memory PCB's are to be coded prior to their installment

(Jumper setting, depending on their capacity) (see 6.4/5).
Note:
The EPROM - range is to be coded from high (starting with
address 4096) to low, while the RAM - range is to be coded
from low to high (starting with address 28 671).
If only one memory module of the type 6ES5 350-5AA21 is

used, the variable data must be stored into the RAM!
9.5.1 Addressing of RAM-memory module 340
Memory-addresses 1st example 2nd example

in BYTE words
2000 4K
4000 8K
6000 12K
8000 16K
A000 20K
coo0 24K
DFFF 28K-I
Setting the start address Setting the mask

place
NR.._ 51 - - value of
8 & 8 1 word pi"I b a d $ d 8 F, Q I !?!E4'"
l
System 8 (N/2) 9 - 6 E.4.84
On every RAM-memory module 340, code setting of start

address by means of a strapping socket (locution 51) is
required. This is always necessary!
The coding of the start address adheres to the following

rules:
- The RAM range in the user program has to be placed in.
the lower addressrange up to 28K -1.
- The EPROM range has to be placed in the upper range,
starting with 4K.
- Within the RAM section, no address space should be created.
In case of an overlap range in addressing of two RAM memories

or a RAM and an EPROM module, it is required to suppress
the RAM range within the overlap. This is done via another
strapping socket (location 71).
The memory address range to be cancelled out refers to

the absolute address of the memory PCB in question (0 to
8K with 6ES5 340-5AAll; 0 to 16K with 6ES5 340-5AA21).
Capacity of the RAM memory PCB 340:

6ES5 340-5AAll = 8K words
6ES5 340-5AA21 = 16K words
System 8 (N/2) 9-7 E.4.84
9.5.2 PC memory addressing
Addressing the EPROM/RAM memory module 6 ES 5 350 - 3 KA 21:
(Standard with Basic control 2, and an option with Basic control 3)
The module has provision for 2 plug in EPROM modules of the type 6FS5 370
or 37 1 (GWK) , or Ms 820: (GWE) .
EPROM memory modules capacity:

Memory module 370: lK, 2K or 4K words
Memory module 371: 2K, 4K or 8K words
Memory module MS 820: 4K, 8K words
The memory modules are fired individually with the PG670 programming
unit and then plugged into the 350 module.
l Every memory module and the RAM memory must have their start addresses
defined by linking on a link base.
Memory addresses in
Word Bytes This module is divided into 3 areas:
2000 4K - Area 1 4K RAM (words)
4000 8K - Area 2 max BK EPROM (plug in base 1)
6000 12K - Area 3 max BK EPROM (plug in base 2)
8000 16K Each start address must be defined on a

A000 20K link base of which there are 3 coloured
COO0 24K red.
DFFF 28K-1
.a
EPROM module
start address Start address for
Place
Nr. 19 (EPROM 1; max. 8k) 4K RAM
value link for
Nr. 26 (EPROM 2; max. 8k) of the the word
01
address
Jalue
~ 1 II
0
System 8 (N/2) 9 - 8 ~.4.84
The following rules apply for defining the start addresses:

The respective RAM area start address must be defined as the last 28K-
1 word memory cell. The respective EPROM area start address must be
defined as the first 4K word memory cell. There must be no space in
either the RAM area nor the EPROM area.
Please note:
Overlapping on the 65S5 350-5AA21 module in the EPROM memory area
or overlapping an EPROM memory with the RAM area, results in the
overlap area being ignored. The overlap area is not for the user
program.
9.6 Addressinq the input/output modules
The addressing of individual input or output modules is achieved by

defining the BYTE address of the particular module. The addressing is
by means of a link on a link base. The BYTE address is defined as.
a binary number. The figure below shows the value of each link.
Place value of the byte address

* only for analogue inputs/outputs
The address is always defined as the lowest BYTE

System 8 (N/2) 9 - 9 ~.4.84
16 Bit modules (2 BYTES) are defined with an even numbered address.
32 Bit modules (4 BYTES) are defined with a number address divisabla

by 4.
BYTE addresses 0 - 127 are for uses with digital inputs and outputs.
BYTE addresses 128 - 256 are for use with analogue inputs and outputs.
Please note:
INPUT BYTE ZERO should only be used for alarm interrupts

(organisation module OB2 to OB9 existent).
If the INPUT BYTE ZERO is used for normal inputs, every signal
change on the inputs EO.0 to E0.7 interrupts the cyclic program
execution, causing an extension of the cycle time (call organisation
modules OB2 to OB9).
Modules with 16 inputs and outputs Modules with 32 inputs oI: outputs
6ES5 421 . ..link on base 4 445 N65
6ES5 431 . ..link on base 4 6ES5 420... link on base 16 N60
6ES5 432... link on base 2 N90 6ES5 430... link on base 16
6ES5 443... link on base 1 N70 6ES5 450... link on base 3
6ES5 444... link on base 1
6ES5 451... link on base 1
Links
area i p,yoved
Parameter links
O- removed
area
o.o- 3.7
4.0- 7.7
8.0-11.7
o-o- 1.7 12.0-15.7
2.0- 3.7 16.0-19.7
4.0- 5.7 20.0-23.7
6.0- 7.7 24.0-27.7
8.0- 9.7 26.0-31.7
10.0-11.7
12.0-13.7
;g;;.;
Delivered with the SINUMERIK are
18:0:19:7 N60, N65, N70 and N90.
20.0-21.7
22.0-23.7
24.0-25.7
26.0-27.7
28.0-29.7
30.0-31.7
System El (N/2) g - 10 ~.4.84
9.7 Extension rack with connectinq module
The system 8 can also be delivered with a component PC extension

rack. In addition to the input/output plug in slots in the NC
logic rack, the PC extension provides 16 additional plug in slots for
compact peripheral modules (ST53/ST55)
The extension rack is connected via a 0,9m long ca'sle connecting

the 312-5 module to the MS760 module (PC bus connection)
Compact rack with a

bus back pane, air
and cable ducts as
well as 16 plug in
slots for peripheral
modules
Special rack without a power supply

Free slots and power supply slot
sheltered
Digital Inputs EG connection

Digital Outputs E312
.
System 8 (N/2) g - 11 E.4.84
Extension rack Technical data
Ambient temperature oc to -I- 55Oc

i.e. incomingair tamperature
underneath the module rack
(Life of the NICd buffer
battery delimited with
temperatures over 45OC)
Transport and storage

temperature with NT Cd buffer
batteries -4oOc to +60C
Li buffer battery -4oOc to -t-7oc
Humidity class F to DIN 40040
Stress class S to DIN 40040
Mechanical conditions Does not requti mounting in vibration

free cabinet.
Protection IPOO
Weight 16.5 kg
The 5Vpower supply for the input/output modules in rack

the extension
is provided by the NC. As no more than 8 outputs/5V can be transferred
via the 312-5 connection, construction should be on an extension rack as
discussed previously.
.
System 8 (N/2) 9 - 12 ~.4.84
Slot layout
Connection module as standard

6ES5312-5AA31 GWEwith the exter lsion
32 Digital inputs
24 V/N60
32 Digital outputs
24 V/O,5 A/N65
32 Digital outputs 2)
24 V/2 A/N70
16 Digital inputs
24 V/N90, with
collective signal
1) Slots filled on delivery from GWE
2) 2 slots required
Overview 1 shows the slots available in addition to those provided in

the SINUMERIK, for robust modules.
Where the displacement between NC and the extension rack exceeds 0,9 mm
a decentralised arrangement (overview 2) must be employed. Further
information is contained in the catalogues ST53/ST55.
System 8 (N/2) 9 - 13 E.4.84
a Overview
extension
of
rack.
System 8, with
Displacement
central
to last
Overview I
Rack-disposition
extension rack 2,5m of axis
ET, Sprint BT, Sprint 8M, SN,8M 8MC with integrated

with integrated PC 150/13OW PC 150
2. axis
4. axis
1. axis
3. axis
6. axis
k
8. axis
5. axis
7. axis
0. axis
r-12. axis
k9. axis
-11. axis
1
-I i
I
I
1I
L ----em Displacement NC -Rack: ,
1 gOcm fixed by interface ,
i module cable length
I f
II r --- -------------
II
Delivery ex GWE
I
Compact modules
6 ES5 182 - 3K801
without power supply
Robust modules
with-fen-- \ I
I
6~S5 l&30-3AAll I NO further extension
or
or 6ES5 181-3AAl racks permitted, as
furthl
only 5A (previously,
nodummy 'cable 2.5 mm') resp.
8A (now, cable 4 mm')
plugs are available for
required the external peri-
pheral modules.
Free Interfacemodule 312

Interface module 6ES5 312 - 5AA31
6ES5 312 - 5AA31 (GWK)
with cable with cable
Extension rack and

interface are suppliac!
with Basic Controls 1 and 2
l A 301 - 3 interface module is for decentralised extension racks with

inbuilt power supplies (See Overview II)
System 8 (N/2) 9 - 14 E.4.84
Overview System 6
Overview II
Decentralised extension racks
Max Displacement from the control
to last extension rack acia 721 cable 200 m
ST, Sprint 8T, Sprint EM, 8N 8MC with integrated

with integrated PC 150/13OW
PC 150
-
-I- 1
erface module
301-3ABll
6ES5 301-3ABll
(GWK)
I1 dummy plug
760-OABll
1-
Interconnection
Cable 721 (GWK)
6~~5 721-O.. .O
max 200m
I I Further EG 180/181 or
6ES5 310~dABllj
] ,I;;erface module 310 4 EG 182 without power supply _
;5 310-5AA12
\ I I
! I
Interface module
6ES5300-3ABl 1 (GWK)
nterface module
6ES5 300-5Mll
power/
SUPPlY
r tb 113~s wlr;n power To f;rther
I EG 182s with power supplies
supply or dummy plug
6ES5 760-OAAl 1 (GWK) o&&%&&~# (GWK)
Robust modules Gumpact modules
EG 6ES5 182-3AA. 1 (GWK) EG 6ES5 182-3KB61 (GWK)
from ST 55
with power supply andrfan
Connecting further extension racks and peripheral modules, see ST 53 and ST 55.
System El (N/2) 9 - 15 ~.4.84
Overview System 8
and external PC 150C\/150K Overview III
EIMCwith external PC ST, Sprint BT, Sprint f3M, 8N,8M

with external PC
II Cable
and
-. .-
GFC9 340-2N.
6FC9 340-2P.
ength. max Son1
(v!st.
(Wst.
FUrth)
Fiirth)
I -I---l
Pu 511 module
memory PC ;",,",";g~ L (GWI:)
PU
-. SAD.1 511
I / _ memory
Interface module MS721 Interface module MS721

6FC9 331 - OAA (Wst Fuerth) 6FC9 331 - OAA (Wst Fuerth)
(Bridge A-B removed) (Bridge A-S removed)
Module slot: (for MS721) Module slot: NR 5 (for MS721)
- with central controller
6ES5 150 - 3KR61
with power supply
24V 15V/lSA NR63
- with central controller
6ES5 150 Y 3KS51
with power supply 2 x
(24V/5V/lSA) NRS7
For central extension and peripheral modules see ST53 and ST55
System 8 (N/2) g - 16 ~.4.84
9.8 Power supply for PC input and output modules
The power supply voltage must be in the range of -t 20V to +3OV:

Reference voltage I- 24V (VDE 0160, Part I)
For satisfactory control. without spurious signal changes the

almost standardised industrial + 24 V voltage should be provided,
because
- allowable voltage tolerance band permits the use of an unregulated

power supply
- Noise immunity is at its highest
- The signal devices, which have this voltage applied, have an

enhanced switching reliability
- The switching performance is in the best area.
Permitted voltage supply +20 v . . . +30 v

range of Up
(for an individual module
3ov -i-14,25 V . . . -1-30 V: Observe
Permitted the notes on the data sheet for
UPt voltage area the power supply)
14,25V
Reference Up voltage -1-24 V; +25$, -15%

(+I5 v; +579
permitted AC content of 24V 15% of the average DC voltage
supply
Permitted break down to IO V for = 1,5ms
Max. permitted voltage 35 V for = 0,5sec

System 8 (N/2) 9 - 17 E.4.84
9.9 Differences in Interfacing the AG 150s
With the PC's 13OW, 150A/K, several signals (flag bytes

MW 19, MW 46, MW 48, MW 21) have to be specified as data
module no. (DB-no.) and data word no. (DW-no.).
Not so with AG 150s.
Instead of data module no. and data word no. the absolute
address of the PC memory has to be specified (see standard
function blocks for S5-150s).
This is used with the following signals:

- NC alarms read (M16.7)
- R-parameters store (M17.4)
- R-parameters read (M173)
- Current program status pointer (M1.7)
- PC data output via second RS 232 C (M1.4)
- Transfer information from o-buffer (M45.7)
- Information stored in I-buffer (M45.6)
- 1 bit for display coordination (M120.0)
- PC data into input-buffer NC (M120.2)
System 8(N/2) IO- I E.4.84
10. System 8 diagrams
10.1 Operator's panel symbols ET/Sprint 8T
10.2 Cable and equipment overview 8T/Sprint 8T
10.3 Operator* 9 panel symbols 8M/Sprint 8M
10.4 Cable and equipment overview SM/Sprint: 8M
10.5 Operatorfs panel symbols 8MC
10.6 Cable and equipment overview 8MC
10.7 Operator's panel symbols 8N
10.8 Cable and equipment overview 8N
10.9 System 8 accessories

System 8 (N/2) 10 - 2 E.4.84
10.1 9erator's
-----e-e panel s_)rmJbElE f$&ri.nt ---a ST
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 3 E.4.84
Indications
Data selection
Setting up modes
- freely selectable
keys Setting up elements
Direction keys
A rapid traverse
spindle feed/rapid
override \ traverse override
rapid traverse
Data Input/output override active
Adress keys Numerical keyboard with Key ritch fox
-- LF kev (end IOf block) inp UL
T
clear input
cancel word
replace word 0
insert word
POWER
ON module
I Key switch for

operation lock
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 4 E.4.84
10.2 Cable
------ and ecgigment-m---m- overview Elusrint ---- ST
rsader.component
Slamsnsl direct CO,,.
llO2/003
ns100/x103 cant
(l.V24)
-,,J
220 vfu
tlslao/xl04 6FC9 340-4P / . Sl~lU.Z~S ext. outlel
(2.V24) / _PTEO
._.
I
1 220 VnJ
0 6FC9 340-W. 9 L~.~.-T:~~,---~ djrcc, conn.
terminals LB-. --- --- i
220 VN
r ------ _-
1 !
/
i tlS760/X762 I>----------
~;
---7,
2
------w-w I
r;;, - 670 I
rpv.ca7n;;: - ._...I...... y . . . . . . . . . . . ..I.................. ~pr*gmmm;ng un;, ,J- 220 +
eES5 511 --------,e.
-----
6FC9 340-21.
;2 HS7lOIX714 Dip
~+$J=~--\-~;~G---.-~~j
6FC9 340-2P.
-)Q
8 -r 220 v-
;-----------------------------------&, r---------,
Li elf. power supply ;
I 3LV
220 v-.
max. 4 plugs/module
8 6FC9 340-311.
tlsloo/x1o2 I
86FC9 320-51x1 (-WA)

I
r---------
6FC9 340-2s. / I machifle solely
1 signrY/x
IL---B---,-J
---not contained in this descrip!ion
0 max. cable length
-1 possible on/y with basic version 2 0763

System 8 (N/2) IO - 5 E.4.84
6FC9 340-6L.
J
6FC9 320-ZA./-28. 6FC9 198-4ALOO
- a- A-3 I
INUUCTOSYN-
HSZOO/205
tiS230?
6FC9 320-4FA
6FC9 198-ZCHOO
US 24Of X204 6FC9 340-6K.
HS 240/X205
ROD 320 if, Y!i-lf?kr
--- not contained in this d?sdplion connectors:

0 m3.1. cub/c telrgttr 0 6FC9 341-MA ( 7-pole ?, Souriau
@ 6FC9 341-1AB (IZ-pole 1, Souriau
l ) version E/82 Or later
0 6FC9 341-1EA (25-pole ), Siemens
1) 35 m with ROD 426.oog
@ 6FC9 341-1EN (SO-pole 1, Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EC. (IS-pole ), Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1ED (25-pole 1, Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EE (SO-pole 1, Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EF ( 3-pole ), Tuchel
@ 6FC9 341-IEil (SO-pole 1, Siemcns
@ 6FC9 341-1EJ (50-pole ), Siemens
@ bFC9 341-lAC (17-pole ), Siemens
@ 6PC9 341-1EP (SO-pole ), Siemcns

System 8 (N/2) 10 - 6 E.4.84
10.3 Operator's panel symbols 8M/Sprint 8M

--------------------------------------
7 8 9
4
4 5 6
t
1 2 3
-, () 0 LF
System 8 (N/2)
Indications
Data selection
0 Settiy up modes
Axis Axis Feed traverse

selector selector override
Data input/output traverse
Adress keys Numerical keyboard with Key switch for

(end. qf block) inputi int,eLLnck
-clear input \
-cancel word
-reDlace word 0
-insert word
"POWERON" module freely selectable keys
Key switch for

operation lock
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 0 E.4.84
10.4 Cable
L-1- Iand- Ieq$gment-c-II-- overview Sp&nt--I- f3M
HS140/Xl4
8 6FC9
220 VW
340-59.
direct connootlon
-
-220 VN
I
--------_
HSIOO/XlO
(I.V24 II 1 direct connection
0 '220 VW
HSIOO/XlO 6FC9 340-4P
II)
(2.V24 ext. pl .w
50 m 220 VN
hFC9 340-5R. 9
G -
2- 8-l 1 direct connection
with termirlds L-----,----l
220 VN
0
i Servo Unit&~i
I for feeds 1y 1
g connected with @
6FC9 340-6C. / by customer
I
I l--i
L -a----_ ,-4:~ at MS 230 only
0 2m
+--- _-_-___ / -- 1 ext. unit
------w---J
f
IiT,-,,-,,- -- ---I
-...............................-.......-..... rogranming ~*~ l-220 +
k ------___
- I
0
I 6FC9 340-2N.
~~$Jq~~-~~p;;G~~~~.
mp 6FC9 340-2P.
\ $ MS710/X71
8 5
:I-----------------------------------~ 220 v-
I I----------
Ldext. power suppY[
124V
---a- ---.J
220 v-v
n max. h-plugs /module
w 6FC9 340-311.
I
rwer-0; rnid.l.~ 6Fc9 350-1~~
1 Interface
1----------I
control
-
6FC9 3 -
----------- 6PC9 340-4F'
4o 4D _(for MS230)
-
l----------
6FC9 340-2s. I Machine I 6FC9 340-7~
safety signals I
Is-N-----___ J
es- not contained in this specification
0 max. cable length
* Basic control 2 and 3 only
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
---v--m
uszoo/
~30fX2o4
MS23O/XZll
6FC9 19B-4Al.00
6FC9 198-mod I
I
1
bFC9 304~dA.
Ms200/,,,,
MS230/
nS200/,,,6
m
HS230/ 6FC9 340~SPA
6FC9 198~4hKoO INDUCTOSYN- 4.

NS230/X211
SCQlf3 E0h.l
6X9 19&l-2CAOOl
HS240/X204 -,Q 6FC9
HS240/X205
MS24O/X206
US240
MS23dX2~11
Connectors:
e-w not contained in this specification
0 max. cable length 0 6FC9 341-1AA ( 'I-pole ?, Souriau

@ 6FC9 341-1AB (12-pole ), Souriau
@ 6FC9 341-1EA (25-polo ), Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EB (25-pole ), Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EC (15-pole 1, Siemens
@ CFC9 341-1ED (25-polo ), Sicmcns
@ 6FC9 341-1EE (SO-pole ?, Siemcns
@ 6FC9 341-1EF ( 3-pole 1, Tuchel
@ 6FC9 341-1EIl (SO-pole ), Siemens
@ 6FC9 341-1EJ (SO-pole ), Siemons
@ bFC9 341-1AC (17-pole 1, Sicmcns
@ 6FC9 341-1EN (50-pole 1, Siemens
System 8 (N/2) IO - 10 E.4.84
10.5 Operators panel symbols WlC

System 8 (N/2) 10 - 11 E.4.84
Indications Automatic modes
Data selection
-
Settlng up modes
Setting up elements
Spindle Rapid traverse

override override
AXlS Axis Feed traverse

selector Rapid
traverse selector override
Data Input/output
Adress kevs Numerical keyboard with Key switch for
of block) inpu i
f f -
-clear input
-cancel word
- replace word 0
- insert word
fre:ly selectable keys

"POWERON" module
Kev switch for

operation lock
System 8 (N/2) IO - 12 E.4.84
10.6 Cable and equipment overview 8MC
Power supply
220 VW
6FC9 340-SQ.
MSlOO/Xl0~ 6x9 340-4P _

(2.V24: :,
0 6FC9 340-58. Direct COnneCtiOn

2
Tcrminaii i _____ --A
220 VN
LIZ
fly customer connected
with 0
6FC9 340-N.
ISpindle
c---q
0 6FC9 340-b E. /
2
!8. axis1
i--,i
k. ---Iaxis
Ila --- axis1
F;k&(
I>------- ---_ / -- 1 external unit 1

I
-----_-- I
_~..~~~...._.............~.....~.........~....
- Eo,tzinB unit _ I+ O JI-
,o
,
,a 1;:: :::I::: ~~~~~I~~~~-~~~~-~--
; MS71OfX715 J
r---------,1
iti
MSl40/X142
8
;-----------------------------------~, 220 v-
_ 4 Ext. power supply ,
l14V ---- ---A
220 v-
max. 4 plugs/module
- - - - - - -,
0 hFC9 340-3R.
I
6FC9 340-W.,
Interface controll
-----_----I
22 v- IIn: l%l-I&
.4oa Operators . .
/),Tyl i1.6
A& X403 panel x401 --) read Jut .m4
402 component same connect ion 6FC9 3:w:A.
---------- L- _ as operators
Power on module
panel component 1 8
k) Basic control 2
:
r------I-- ,
.-- Not contained in this description I Interface controli
--a--__..._d
0 lLIX- cable lrnpcb
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 13 E.4.84
Q 6FC9 340-26.
l----------
1 Elacbine safety
MS300/Y30C >
MS301 / I- 1 signals
I
I
max. 10 axes,
1. and 2. parallel movement
6FC9 198~GAL00
GFC9 19&2CUOO 1 I
max. 6 axis,,
1. rind 2. parallel movement
-4,
MS32O/X312 6
0 6FC9 340~OK.
MS320/X313
MS32O/X312 -
---I-
MSJ20/X313/-
Connectors:
@ bFC9 341-1Ah ( I-poles), SouriJu
--- Not contained in this description @ 6FC9 341-1AB (12-poles), Souriau
0 max. cable length 0 6TC9 341-1Eh (25-poles), Sicmcns
@ 6FC9 341-IEN (SO-paler 1, Sirarnr
l ) version B/82 at later
,) 35 m with ROD 426.009 @ 6FC9 341-1EC (15-poles), Sir:r,cn>
@ 6FC9 341-1l:D (25~poles). Sic:xna
0 bFC9 341-lr:C (50-p1>les,, Sivxns
cj> 6FC9 341-1EP ( 3-poles), luchul
@ GFC9 351-IEll (SO-polrs), :ic.wns
(Q 6~~1) J41-IEJ (50~poles), Sirneni
@ 6FCJ 34l-IAC (17~pules), Sirnens
73 htC) 341-ll:l f5O-p,~Ic~l. Sir7cn:,

System 8 (N/2) 10 - 14 E.4.84
10.7 Ofieratorh panel 'symbols 8N

a
System 8 (N/2) IO - 15 E.4.84
Indications Autbmatic modes
Data selection
a Setting UP modes
- 3rd Axis P/B

Setting up elements
Direction keys
feed/rapid
\ traverse override
l Data input/output
Adress keys Numerical keyboard with Key switch for
b- LF kev (end clf block) incur interlock
clear input I-
cancel word
replace word O
insert word
"POWERON" module
I Key switch for

operation lock
System 8 (N/2) In - 16 E.4.84
10.8 Cable
---w-w and eq$pmentL----L----overview SN
61'C'l NO-SQ.
g customer wiring
wifh conneclor @
@
6lW9 x0-hC, /
a
. / .Extension rack
without PS 312-5
------w-w
5% - 670 I
_. __. . . . . . . . . . ..I...--_..-._.......-.-.-- 1 progromm;ng i, ]t- 220 J !U
I I 1 i l-,---7,-,J ,70 vy
i----8 * .-
------------------------------~
I I---------- l,
c4 erf. power supply
1-we--
24v m--J
220 v-
max. 4 plugs/module
t I
---- ---a
Lterloce conlrol I
I--,-------I
Sprint BT: 6FC3 066-3D.l

BT: 6FC3 Oa6-3DJ
Sprint EM: 6FC3 346-3DJ
r--------- WC: 6FC3 356-3DJ
(LWR 6FC9 340-2s. / I mochine solely I
I signol5
I---------- :
---not conloined in this d?scrip!ion
0 max. cobtr length

System 8 (N/2) IO - 17 E.4.84
------_
HS?llO/
)lS23D/X?D4
0
I-J----
bl:CY 320-2A./-ZP.
MSJOl)!
.-
Ms230,x2D5 I /
-, 0 Ljm,
,-bFC9 340-bL.
6FC9 32&2A./-28.
MS 2401 X204
MS240fX206
m-w not contained in !/J/S d?s:riplion Connectors:

@ bFC9 341-1AA ( 7-polig) , Souriau
@ 6FCY 341-1AB (IZ-polid, SUuriJu
@ 6FC9 341-!EA (25-polild, Sismens

1) 35 m with ROD 426.009 @ bFCY 341-1EC (15-pOlig), Siemens
@ 6FCy 341-ll:D (25-polig), Siemens
@ bFC9 341-IEE (5Wpolic), Siemfns
@ 6FcY 341-1m ( J-polio), Tucl~ol
@ 6FCY 341-1EH (50-polig), Siemcns
@ 6FCY 341-IEJ (50-polig), Siemcns
@ 6FCY 341-IAC (17~polig). Siemcns
@ 6FC9 341-1EN (SO-&dig), SiemenS

@J GFC9 341-1EP (SO-p0lig) , Siema-~S
System 8 (N/2) IO-18 E.4.84
10.9 System 8 Accessories
Complete cables max. length Order-no.
INDUCTOSYN-scale connections 0.335 m

length 0.335 m 6FC9 198-4ALOO
between INDUCTOSYN-pre-amp. lm
and INDUCTOSYN scale '
length 1 m 6FC9 198-4AKOO
between INDUCTOSYN adapter 50 m

and INDUCTOSYN - pre-amp.
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6LC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6LE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6LF
between INDUCTOSYN adapter 50 m

and INDUCTOSYN slider
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6MC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6ME
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6MF
bus interface to 50 m
interface control cable 1
length* 5 m 6FC9 340-2NB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-2NC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-2NE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-2NF
bus interface to 50 m
interface control cable 2
length 5 m 6FC9 340-2PB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-2PC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-2PE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-2PF
between INDUCTOSYN adapter * 15 m

and logic rack (MS 200/MS 230/
MS 3101,
length 1 m 6FC9 340-6PA
length 2 m 6FC9 340-6PM
to machine1 (safety signals) 50 m

length 5 m 6FC9 340-2SB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-2SC
to operator's panel 50 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-3RB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-3RC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-3RE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-3RF
* new adapter from ca. 8/82 on

System 8 (N/2) 1 o-1 9 E.4.84
to the manual pulse 25 m

generators ( max. two (40 ml 2)
handwheels) 1)
length 5 m 6FC9 340-4FB -4DB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-4FC -4DC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-4FE -4DE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-4FF -4DF
to the manual pulse 25 m
generator (only one (40 m) 2)
handwheel) 1)
length 5 m 6FC9 340-4EB -7KB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-4EC -7KC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-4EE -7KE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-4EF -7KF
to tape reader Siemens 35 m

length 5 m 6FC9 340-5QB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-5QC
to Teletype 30 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-5RB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-5RC
to FACIT 4030/4040 35 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-5SB
to FACIT 4070 with MI77 35 m

Length 5 m 6FC9 340-5VB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-5VC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-5VE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-5VF
to Siemens PT 80 35 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-4PB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-4PC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-4PE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-4PF
to printer Siemens PT 88 35 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6WB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6WC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6WE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6WF
to portable Siemens reader 35 m
(6FC9 310-OBA)
length 5 m 6FC9 340-4VB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-4VC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-4VE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-4VF
1) plug subminiature 25-pole for MS 200/MS 300 (301)

2) with reinforced diameter from 3/84 on, 4 x 0.38 mm2
System 8 (N/2) 10-20 E.4.84
to PD - station 35 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-4WB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-4WC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-4WE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-4WF
to axis servo drives 40 m
axes 5 to 12 (8MC only)
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6EB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6EC
to axis servo drives 50 m
axes 1 to 4
to mainspindle servo drive
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6CB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6CC
to main spindle coders 50m *
and digital system 35 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6KB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6KC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6KE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6KF
to resolver gear box 50 m
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6LB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6LC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6LE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6LF
to ext. position read out 50 m
length 10 m 6FC9 340-3SC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-3SE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-3SF
length 50 m 6FC9 340-3SG
to dig. rotary measuring 35 m
system ROD 320
length 5 m 6FC9 340-6NB
length 10 m 6FC9 340-6NC
length 18 m 6FC9 340-6NE
length 25 m 6FC9 340-6NF
* In case of pulse-coder power supply via cable, the

maximal cable length is limited to 35 m.
System 8 (N/2) IO-21 E.4.84
l Complete cables max. length Order-no.
flat bus cable for connecting 600 mm

one logic module 6FC9 340-7DA

two logic modules 6FC9 340-7CA

position displays for four
axes or less than that 6FC9 340-7M
position displays for five
axes or more 6FC9 340-7BA
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 22 E.4.84
Necessary accessories Order-No.
Apparatus
INDUCTOSYN-scale
metric, linear, 250 mm 6FC9 198-2CAOO
measuring period 2 mm
INDUCTOSYN- slider
measuring period 2 mm,96 bar: 6FC9 198-2CBOO
length lOOmm,acL len,gth70mm
pre amp for

matching of INDUCTOSYN 6FC9 320-4FA
Taperpin for INDUCTOSYN 6FC9 198-2CJO0
pulse coder, 1)
1024 pulses /rev 6FC9 320-1DA
Twin type pulse coder
1024/9000 Pulses/rev. 1) 6FC9 320-IEA
Resolver gear box I)

5 mm/rev. 6FC9 320-2AB
excentric
Resolver gear box 1)

10 mm/rev 6FC9 320-2AC
excentric
Resolver gear box 1) 6FC9 320-2BB

Smm/rev
concentric
Resolver gear box 1)

10 mm/rev 6FC9 320-2BC
concentric
1) Including disc coupling

6/6 mm and 3 clamps
System 8 (N/2) 10 - 23 E.4.84
Accessories
INDUCTOSYN adaptor for 1 axis

(Version up to B/82) 6FC9 304-OAB
Handwheel 6FC9 320-5DA

Encoder 2000 pulses/rev I>
1)
6FC9 320-3CA
Encoder 2500 pulses/rev 6FC9 320-3CB
Encoder 5000 pulses/rev 1)
6FC9 320-3CC
Position display for 1 axis
I 6FC9 350-1AK
Bus interface for external AG150A 6FC9 331-OAA
MS 721A Robust
Logic module 2 6FC9 331-OJA
56 inputs/28 outputs
Extension to the Sinumerik operator's panel
Logic module 3 6FC9 331-OKA

56 inputs/56 outputs
Extension to the Sinumerik operator's panel
Inductosynadapter
(Version B/82 or later)
for 1 axis 6FC9 320-3GB
for 2 axis 6FC9 320-3GC
for 3 axis 6FC9 320-3GD
for 4 axis 6FC9 320-3GE
for 5 axis 6FC9 320-3GF
for 6 axis I
6FC9 320-3GG
1) including disc coupling 6/6 mm and 3 clamps

System 8 (N/2) 10 - 24
E.4.84
Order data
Accessories
Necessary accessories Order-No.
Connectors
Connector 7 poles male

-6FC9 198-4BDOO male plug 6FC9 341-IAA
-6FC9 198-4BDlO housing
Connector 12-poles male

-6FC9 198-4BFOO male plug 6FC9 341-IAB
-6FC9 198-4BFlO housing
Subminiatur
Connector 25-poles male 6FC9 34'l-IEA
Subminiatur
Connector 25-poles female 6FC9 341-1EB
Subminiatur
Connector 15-poles female 6FC9 341-IEC
(complete with housing)
Subminiatur
Connector 25-poles female 6FC9 341-IED
Subminiatur
Connector 50-poles female 6FC9 341-1EE
Small round connector

3-poles male (Minicon T326) 6FC9 341-1EF
Subminiatur
connector 50-poles male 6FC9 341-IEH
complete with housing
Subminiatur
Connector 50-poles female 6FC9 341-1EJ
- (counter
. . . - _. - plug solder connectio
K form plug 6FC9 341 - IFA
-
l'l-poie socket 6FC9 341-1AC
Connector 50-pole socket (MS 721) 6FC9 341-IEN

(complete with housing and
sliding bar)
Connector 50-poles 6FC9 341-1EP

(user connector for MS 500)
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 1 E.4.84
11. Cable diaqrams

Syotom 8 (N/Z)
E.4.84
Cable name - Axis/Spindle Drives 11 - 2
Order numbcr - MC9 340 tic.
Nodule - ~~230, ms30a
Velocity command signal ('!

black
CVSl b I/ 1st
yiiocity
Atin
command groun
/- If
I '
,2 , 1 x x x x brown c
CVGl I I '
J
I I I I
I I
)4 ]I rod 2nd Axis I I
cvs2 I I I II
p ! ! Z Y Y V oron 2nd Axis I !I
CVG2
J
I I I I
cvs3
7 I! Yellpw 3rd Axio r rl
I
CVG3 I8 II - Z Z 3. 9r=m 3rd Axis I II
J I1
cvs4
10 II I1I bluo Spindle r II
CVG4
41 ! I s s s - vio1st Spindle I I
J I '
,12
II
I grey c* 4th Axis r Il
cvs5
CVGS
,13 i ! - 4. 4. 4. white, 4th Axio I ii
I I Controller inhibit con!mqn
I1 I
14 i ! white/black 1st Axis I- II
L SEC1
SESl
19 II x x x x whfto/brown
*Controller
1st Axis
inhibit sig
J
1 al
I!
I
,15 I I white/rod 2nd Axis
SEC2 I
L SES2
20 !
I
I Z Y Y Y white/orange 2nd Axis
16 ,I ) white/yellow 3rd Axis

SEC3
L SE'S3
21 ,i ! - z z 3. white/prap[l 3rd Atis
17 1 ! white/blue Spindle
L SEC4
32 1 1 S S S l ) white/violet Spindle %% leads can be
SES4
I *oducod to a
lioglq cgductor
18 i ! whife/arav 4th Axi5
SEC5 I 1y Jumping thorn
23 ! 1 - 4. 4. 4. brown/black 4th Axis / !I In the controller
lidc (contnollar
SES5 I J I nhibit.common)
II II
MEXT
26 cora cable
twisted pairs
screened 13 x 2 x 0,1E12
3 free pairs ,) Connection tlNt
i I
I
II
Casing Scroon I
g : ;m&
5 way
ubmin. Y
I Socket Casing
II J
ncket
8Mci x305
8N : x202
Soldering
Side
System S (N/2) 11 - 3 E.4.84
Cable name - Drive Controllers (5th - 10th Axes, 1st and 2nd simultaneous axoo)
Order numbar - 6FC9 340 -SE.
Module - MS300
1)
Core
r. Colour
1 II Velocity command signal black
5th Axis
-DC CVSC I I
I cK6
-D- cvsl
t 2 cvG7
+ CvS8
t cnG8
-+- cvs9
t ' cx9
-u- CWS10
I . csmo
-p- cxsll
1 ' CvGll
+ cvs12
j-- cVGl2
5EC Loads
+ cvs13
:an bo roducad
t cVG13
to a single
M Conductof by
Jumping them on
M
the controller side
(controller inhibit
common)
SE!12
SE12
1
SEX313
SITS13
Cesing Scresn twistad pairs

g Socket casing screened 21,22 x 0,'lS2
z 50 woy 4 free peire
.* Submin.
o Sock&
2
System 0 (N/2) 11 - 4 E.4.84
Cable name - Rssolwer (as shown up to IX. the end of 1981)
Order numbor - 6FC9 340 -6L.
Module - MS230, MS310
black,;
rod
rod/white
yellow/whi
, 1 I brawn r I
+5v >- I
1 ! I white I '
orange
16 cora cable
twistad pairs
screened
0x 2 x o,102
i1
I
I
I
I
I
I!
Casing Scrsen i1
Socket. casing
1I 7 pin
Souriau
plug
1 1
Soldering Soldering side
Side 8-40-21-850
Syotom 8 (N/2) 11 - 5 E.4.84
Cablc name - Resolver (as shown aftcr ca. tho beginning of 1982)
Order number - 6FC9 340 -GL.
- MS230, MS310
P. 1)
Core
I I Colour
, 1 1 black Sina, bil 0
R SIN1 I I I
I j
1 brown Sine 2 I yellow
R SIN2 I J
I 1
red Cooino 1 I black
R cost
4 i I
02 I red
R COSZ I J
)l2 1 I yellow Error Signal I- rod/wliite

ERR S I
,11 Ii grey Error / I! ;
I II
Signal ground yolloy/whi
ERR M
-I [IT
18 1 f black 0,52 i !,,
M (OVI
15 1 IAwn "-5 2 I 1
M (OV) 1 I I !
J i i rod 0.52 Il
t5v I1
14 i ! yallow 0.5~ ! 1
t5v I I
II
12 cora cablo I1
acreeno
4 x 0.5
9 I1 Resolver
4 x 2 x 0.382
twisted pefro II
1 free pair
I1
Il
II
Il
I/
I
I1
II
Il
I
Il
;I
I l
I l
I l
Coaing Soroon I l
15 w5y
Sock& casing
1I 7 pin
jubmin. Sourim
jock& plug
Soldering
Side
Systrm S(N/Z) 11 - 6 E.4.84
Cab10 name - INDUCTDSYN measuring system (as shown, up to ca. tho ond of 1981)
Brdsr numbor --
Nodule - MS230, MS310
INDUCTOSYN INDUCTOSYN
Adaptor Slider
5
IN SIN1
IN SIN2 SIN1
SIN2
IN COSl
IN COSZ
15 way
Submin
PhJQ
I Casing scrocn
I Socket caoing
Inductosyn Inductqsyp
Adat. pre-amplifier
UFK 200
ERR!
ERIU
t5v
I5 way 7 pin
jubmin. Souriau
jock& glug
I Socket casing
Sock& casing
Soldering aide
16 core cable 8-40-21-830
twisted pairs
screonod 8 x 2 x O,lS
System 8 (N/2)
11 - 7 E.4.84
Cob10 nnmo - INDUCTOSYN odaptor (as shown up to co. tho and of 1901
Order numbcr - 6FC9 340 -0A.
1)
Core
Colour
ye1l@w Sin0 1
IN SIN I .
6 I! block Sine 2 / t! 6,
IN SIN
I I
bl
IN COS
IN COS
ERRS
ERWl Error oigkl ground
b2
0roBn
+5v
white
4, '
+5v
4.. green
white I I!
16 core cnbh I 1
twiatcd paira
acroencd 0 x 2 x O,lS*,
15 way 15 way
Submin. Submin.
Sock& Plug
Soldering
Sfde
Syvtcm 0 (N/2) 11 - a E.4.84
Cable name - INDUCTOSYNslider (as shown up to CO. the end of 1901)
Order number - 6FC9 340 6M.
Nodule - MS230, MS310
Colour
Colour I 1
yollow
I
I I bleck I I! ,
gram
gram I- I I,,
black
J II
9w
bleck
brown
iIN
black I !I& SIN2
bl II I!
INDUCTOSY
white
Taper pin
[NDUCTOSI
ldaptor 16 core cable II

twisted pairo I1 INDUCVSY
screened 8 x 2 x 0,1E12
Il slider
I
Il
Il
I
Il
Il
Il
Il
Il
Il
Il
Casing acreen
!
15 way
Submin.
Socket
Y Socket casing
Nachi ne
!L
ground
Soldering
Side
System 0 (N/2) 11 - 9 E.4.84
Cablc name - IWJCTOSYN pre-amplifier (OS shown up to CD. tho end of 1981)
Order numbor - 6FC9 340-6L.
1)
Coro
Colour
, i; yo11ow f'l ,
2 i I, black /pi! 2-
I J 11
groan rrl 3,
3 i I
4 ! 1 b$q& , 4
1 I J II
I i 9w Error signal
12 r iRRS
71 black Error signal ground I
I ERRM
J
I I brown r
1 ! block I
0
Ij II J
b2
, orango
" 1 ; block
II
I ; yo11ow
II white
I I
. II green rt; 5
15v
4, I! white
I ii ,y
II I
NDUCTOSY i I ilOlJCTOSYN
adaptor 16 core cable
co-smplifi
twistad pairs I ?K 200
scroonad 0 x 2 x 0,102
I I
Il
I
5 way
Submin.
Y Socket cooing
7 pin
Souriau
Socket Plug
Soldering
Sidde Soldering oido
a-40-21-830
System 0 (N/Z) 11 - 10 E.4.84
Cable name - INDUCTOSYN measuring nysixm (cs showrr nftsr ca. the b59inning of 1982)
Ovsrvicw
Nodule - NS230, MS510
INDUCTOSYN
INDUCTOSYN slider
adaptor Ist..6th axis
f\ CI
S 261
,5 Sina 1
I SIN1
6 !I Sin0 2
II SIN2
iI
I
II X262
I
II
I!
IN SIN
IN SIN;
I 1 Cosine 1 11 9
I1 I. 10.
IN COS
1I Cosine 2
IN COS: I -/ I
ERR S
X261 INDUCTOSYN
ERR H +h-amplifier
WK 200
M (OV
t1 (OV
ERR S
X263
ERR H
15way way 7 pin

subyin.
]i bmih,. Sodris U
jock&
1 I Casing
Soctiet
acreen
cooing
I
L PI w
Plug
i2-J f-u
Soldering Soldering aide

Side
12 core cabla
ncroane
4 x D,5 9
4 x 2 x 0,382~
twisted pairs
1 fcaa pair
System 8 (N/2)
11 - 11 E.4.84
Cable name - INDUCTOSYN adaptor (cs shown, after ca. the beginning of 1902)
Ocdor numboc - 6FCg 340 -GPA
5
IN SIN 1 I Sine 1 /- ! I 5,
5INl
6 !I brown Sins42
IN SIN,
J SIN2
g j i red Cosirje 1
IN COS LOS1
1 I
IN ~0s; I !IlO,
+-I-?--
)l2 I! yellow
C-R
Error signal
II zos2
ERR S ERR S
I
)ll I , grey Error signal qround
ERR M I ERR M
1 I
+5v
,7 1 rod 0,52 I 1 7,
I, i YO~~OW o,s2
5v
14 I 114,
+5Y 5V
I I '
p I i black 0,5~
M (OV) ! 1 8,
i I, 1 (OV)
M (OVI ,15 brown 0,52
I 115, (OV)
II II
12 core cable
screen0
g [NOUCTOSYN
4 x 0,5
IdaPtor
4 x 2 x 0,3a:
twisted pairs
1 free pair
15 way!
iubmin.
lug
System 0 (N/2)
11 - 12 E.4.84
Cable name - INDUCTOWN slider (as shown after ca. the beginning of 1982)
Order number - WC9 340 -ml,
Module - NS230, MS310
MS 261
' SIN1 [Nl
[N2
SIN2
CNDUCTOSYN
Cosine 1 Caper pin
COSl
cos2
$ M (OV)
; M (OV)
a
: 44 (OV)
I i yellow 0,52 lnds remain
z M (OV) I bpen, no
1 ! i block 0,52
:onnection to
$ M (OV) I i
Lny conductor.
5 i,! brown 0,52
. M (OV) i
12 corn cable
NDUCTOSYk
NDUCTOSYN ecret3ne
!2 lider
dsptor 4 x 0,5
tlt4ttr
4 x 2 x 0,382
XEO
twisted pairs
oQng screen Insulate the

15 way
Submin. - Y Socket casing
N(ov)
this
core from
ground. Machine
ground
Socket
Soldering
Side
System S (N/2) 11 - 13 E.4.84
Cable name - INDUCTDSYN pro-omplifior ( as shown aftor co. tho bcginning of 1982)
Order number - GFCS) 340 -6L.
1)
/. Core
IS 261 f-1
ii Colour
black ,!I 1
11 i brown I, 2
I
I I II
i I, orange I
I J
! ERRS
2 ;I yellow Error signal r [R S
-El
1 II prny Error oiqnol ground
I ! J Ill IR M
i ERR
i ! black OLi2
5 fi brown 0,Ei2
I I I !
I i rod op52 Il
I 1 iV
4 ; ! yellow o,s2 ! I
I! II
I2 core coblo INDUCTOSY
acroene pro-ampli
9
adaptor 4 x D,5 UFK 200
4 x 2 x 0,3d
twisted pairs
1 Free pair lat-6th I:
Socket caning
7 pin
15 way
Souriau
5ubmin.
Plug
Socket
Soldcring
aide
SYstem B(N/2)
11 - 14
E.4.84
Cablo namo -
INOUCTOSYN sccle
Order numbor - 6FC9 190 -4AK00
B:
ERRS 1
ERRS 2
1 P
-
flagnetic
II
_//I I-
1
t
ERR.51
ERRS2
iTOW Screen / AMP

i I
rxv2t. Tapor pir
a
IN01 JCTOS
pre-r mplf I NOUCTOSYr
VFK 200 scales
-
System 8 (N/Z) 11 - 15 E.4.84
Cablc name - Main spindle encoder/Digital linear or rotary measuring davicos (as shown, up to ca. the ond of 1901)
Order numbor - 6FC9 540~GK.
e
Module - ~~230, MS 250, MS320, MS300
CDMA 1
1 Colour
I! L~yalloq A Puloo i! 1 I ' "al
* ! i black\ *A Pulse
*CDMA II 2,
I L K-l
I I
g !I green\ B Pulse 113
CDMB r "a2
+
5 ! [black\ B Pulse ! I 4,
*CDMB L u,2
9 !! 6,
CDMZ "a0
It
i iblock \
L Marker Pulse il 7,
*CDMZ
I! u,o
+5v i &own\
I
+5v i! L +5v
I
1 Iblack\ fl (ov) 1c
M Cd OV
L
I ; I
, I orencn3
oranm
1--
,,i ! black
L
I !,
I I !
i I
*UAS rvollav 1 B
u,,
I '
,] /white\
I L
I
I Igreon\ +5v
ib ' +5v
I white fl (ov)
5
I L ov
16 core oablo i1
twisted
screonod
pairs II
B x 2 x 0,1B2 Il
Il
II
II
Il
II
[ j Casing Scroon II
Socket Screen
15 way
Y
Submin.
Sock& I L 11 12,way.
Souriau
Plug
t3-40-51-830
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 16
E.4.84
Cable name - Main spindla encoder/Digital linear or rotary measuring dovice (as shown after ca the beginning of 1902)
Order numbe6 - 6 FC9 540 -GK.
Nodule NS230, MS250, MS320, MS300
1)
Core
A Pulse c,~~o,~r
COMA U
I al
*
2 A Pulse brown
*CDMA G-i
I
4 f3 Pulse red
CDMB U a2
5 !! * B Pulse orange
*CLIMB,
1 1 u,e
Marker Pulse blue

CDMZ
I uaO
*CDMZ 1 *Marker Pulse violet

UaO
I
I * Fault Signal yollonI
*UAS 1 u,s
I
1 II M (ov) 9w
M(OV)
II J !I
+5v +5v
+5v +5v
M(OV) M(OV)
M(OV) M(OVl
12 cora cable,
screene
/i
!I
4 x 0,5
4 x 2 xo,3G
Il
twisted pairs Il
1 II
II
II
Il
Il
II
Il
Il
Il
II
#2 uay
Casing screen
I5 way Socket casing itiuriau
iubmin.
iocket 3
Soldering Soldering *side
Side 8-40-31-830
4
Syetsm B (N/2) 11 - 17 E.4.84
Cable name - Digital rotary measuring systom (ROD 320) (Ao choun up to CC. the end of 1981)
Order numbcr - 6FC9 340 -6N.
Nodule - MS230, MS250, MS320
.
CO!X f-1
i*i Colour:
1 1 , yEmow r A Pulse I! 4
CDMA I I I I I
*CDMA
I I .
, green r B Pulse it B
COMB I
*
5 1 black 0 Puleo !! F
*CDMB
J I '
' I
9 I 1 gw r Markor Puloo !! F
CDMZ
I ' I
*
*CDMZ 10 1 ! block Marker pulse I G.
I .J
7 /I , brown +5!4 II ~':
+5v r
+!a
y I black fl b) ]I tj
M I+- DV
J
! orange I ]
-L
I '
il
4 ' block -I
I !,,
I 1
i I
*UAS 12 ,y cllow f- I! 1 v,,
! 1 white 1 IL
I J
I ! I I
c -
+5v r
+5v il J +5v
M b)
M OV
J
r +5v
i I white
& ' OV
J
16 core ceblc
twisted pairs
ocrasned SPARE
iI
1 I 8 x 2 x o,1e2
Casing scroan
Socket casing
IS way 17 way
jubmin. Soldering side ruchel
0
.e- '0
jockat MS voe :;r ;bi Socket
E 20-295 '0 0: p a'
'0.. 0'
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 18 E.4.84
Coblo namB - Digital rotary measuring oystcm (ROD 320) (As shown after ca the beginning of 1902)
Order number - 6FC9 340 -6N.
Nodule - NS230, MS250, MS320
r
1)
Core
Colour (i
black A pulse I A,
CDMA "al
I 1 * ! I
2 1 i brown A pulse I; 0,
*CDMA
I ' n;;i
I I
rod B pulse ! 1 8,
4 I(
CDMB "a2
* I .
1 I
5 11 orange B pulse I! E,
*CDMB I k
1 I blue Master pulse
9 11 !! F, u a0
CDMZ I *
I I I !
10 I 1 viol& Master puloo il G
*CDMZ II u,o
I 1
*UAS J2 !i ycllow 1i
1
L,
KG
;m btj !I T
11 I I grey
M(OV) M(W)
I
1I
1I II
7 Ii
1 red 0,52 +sv
. I +5v
,14 I! yollow cJ,52 +5v ;I ,

I +5v
]I black O,52 M bJ) I! N,

M(OV) I , M(W)
2 I;
M(OV)
15 !I brown 0.5 rl lov) 4 NOW
II
12 core cable
screened
4 x 2 x20,382
4,x 0,5
R,
s,
Jk Spare
Jb +5v
Casing screen
Socket casing 17 way
WOY Tuchel
bmin. Socket
ckot So&hring side-i..,
MS 3108
EE 20-296
0 9.
l -
l 1.a-0.
t;.c.
l L
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 19 E.4.84
Lable name: 1 Handwheel

Order No. : 6FC9 340-7K.
Module : MS 200, MS 300, MS 301
lore
.dentif ica on
1 black I[ A
Channel A
HPGA I. Q
I \
7 I, (OV) brown ! !s
MEXT L I I
I
9 I 1 3 Channel B red
HPGB
21 ; ,I orange
M(OV)
MEXT
I 1 L I1
P (t5V) yellow
5V ext
ia Auxiliary signal green
HPGSEl I L
I
5V ext
DRF .--4.
Cable lug for H4

open wire end 50 mm Handwheel
cable end finished
wire colour green @CSE
and white/green (DRF)
open wire end 100 m
16 core cable
twisted pairs
screened
8x2xO.18~
4 free pairs
Casing screen
aT: x 20 Socket casing
aw x 20
akfc: x 30 soldering side
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 20 E.4.84
Cable name : Handwheels

We : 8WQ Order No. : 6FC9 340-4D3.
Module : MS 200, MS 300 (301)
+5v
MEXT
handwheel 1
HPGAl
HPGB 1
MEXT handwheel 2
II r I
HPGAZ 0 IIII
A
12
IIII -
b,
HPGB2 1 B
II
,r . P I I ?lEXT
IPGSE 1 a 1, aux. signal 1 * slide switch

d
, II *
P 4
iPGSE2
+jV
iPGSE:
II P I !
I7 I I switch handwheel
DRP t-
J
u to be t key switch
soldered I DRF
20 core cable
OOP
ooc twisted pairs
NNP screened
xx5 10x2x0.18'
.. .. a 25pole
C cannon
HE:
mm0 socket
:asing
,ocket
screen
casing
!
I
soldering side
L-
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 21 E.4.84
Cable name : 1 Handwheel (as shown up to ca. A 3/8&j
Order No. : 6FC9 34C-4E.
Module : MS 230
:ore
iontlfica In
Channel A black
HPGA I
I 'I \ M (ov) brown

MEXT
Channel 0 red !i Jj
HPGB 1
52 \ fl (ov) orange 1 I_
MEXT
I 1 I I
5Vext
1 !I ~ P (+5v) yellow I!
I1
HPGSEl
\ au. sianal 1 ----- l I
p (+W whito/yollo(l 1
5Vext
Switch Hendqhoel whito/groonl
I
DRF --d*
I .---
cable lug for M4
open wire end 50 mm
II
cable end finished
wire colour
II !andwhesl
green (WGSE~)
and white/green (DRF)
open wire end 100 mm
III l
II
16 core cablo
twiotod polrn
II
screened
I
8 x 2 x 0,182
II
4 fro0 pairs
Il
I
II
II
I
Il
Il
Il
I l
I
I l
Casing
Socket
ocroon
casing
I
15 way 1/
iubmin
iocket
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 22 E.4.84
Cable name : 1 Ilandwheel (as shown after ca. A 3/84)

Order No. : 6FC9 340-4E.
Module : MS230
core 2
0
ore
dentifica
1
ti on
colour
open wire end ;:
P f*SV)
5v ext.
P I*SVl
sv ext.
I t black 6,s H IOVI I; I

HEX1 , oov
I
I
5 _ !I b rown 0,s H IOV) 1 I ,)
HEX1 I
I
1 I I I I
I
I
b
I
I
I
1 black Channel A 1 iIt t 1 I
HP6A
II I, r II r lOA
1 OA
I ! brown H (OV)
H (OV) II,
I r I I
L I
I I I] (
HP68
I I I red Channel B 7 , .B B
\ iI ! iI
I, 1 I! orange H
H IOV)
IOV) \L 1;
I L 1 ' 4, L-- --
!! ii
1
I ! I blue aux. signal 1 7 -m
-m
:II \ I I
I 1i violet HlOVt
HlOVt \ II,,
I
I I L II
I2 yellow switch handwheel

DRf
1 [ grey H IOV)
I 1
wire colour blue
(HPCSEl) end
yellow (DEF)
open wire end 100 mm
these cores are only i
used with System 8
I
I
cable
15 way 4x2x0.38 I 1
Submin. 4x0.5
t
Socket screened
t I
8T,811 :X203
Sprint 8T, Sprint 8b!:X203
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 23 E.4.84
Cablo name - 2 Hand wheels
l Order
Nodule
numbor
-
- 6FC9
MS230
340 -4F
c 1)
f-1
i-i CON
Colour I 1
4 IIT Channol Al black !I A

HPGAl I r- 0
a II \ N (0~) brown !! o\
MEXT I rto
1 I
HPGBl
1 iI ~ Chenncl El red !! 8
I '
;I \ O!J.9"90
N (0~)
s.
I ! II I.
i I P (m) yellow +5v
7-I 7
5Vext 1
gcson 1 7
9 I! \ au. signal 1
HPGSEl L 1 -
I
II -
II y B (+5v) . blue
1 .
au. signal 2 violet

HPGSE2 I
i 1
5 !L Channul A2 grey
HPGAL I
I1 \ N (ov) white !! o\
MEXT L
1 I I It"
2 I;, Chonnol 82 white/black ,II &
HPGBZ I
I
II \ PI (ov) white/brown ; I,
I I!
14-I 1 7 P (+SV) white/red 11 +
SVext
I4
)I \ aux. signal 3 s.
HPGSEJ 11
I L 1
II \ P (+5v) whito/yollow
I1
Stitch hond whoolo whito/qreen i / __
DRF
M4 push on
connectors
The cab&o end is

i1
I
16 core cobla wt pro-prepared
twisted pairs I
scrsemd I !
Ii 4x2
I
I
1I Casing screen
Socket casing
I!
Soldoring
15 way
Submin. 3-J Sido
Socket
.
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 24 E.4.84
Cable name - Machine safety signals
Ordar number - 6FC9 340 -2s.

Noduls - NS230, MS300
i-l core !7
Cblour
1i
EMERG 1 black *EMERGENCY STOP - I
rl!
,I
STOP
; i ! brown
!-lEXT I 1 A II
SERVO
[
I
1 red Drive controllers ready er, , ;IIi
READY
i !i orange 1 I!
!lEXT 1 1 -I II
II
l
!JIBBLING I 11,,I yellow Signal for ON Ff-
1
BERO
1 I! praen I
UEXT I 1 d 1
, i 1 blue Frea C-F, 1I

AUX
IMPUT
I, I
a/
3 !I violet. II1
MEXT
NC- I4 !I grey NC ready .2 Br 1I I

READY 2 I1 / I[
15 I I whito External 24v -
J II
II 16 core
twisted
cable
pairs
1i
II screened I
Il
I1II 0x
3 frse
2 x o,1a2
pairs II
Il
1I Il
I
II II
II II
I Il
II II
II Il
1I I
II
I II
1I II
1I I
I I
II Il
II !j
15 way
Submin. 2
Sobket
t
11 - 25 13.4.84
System Cl (N/2)
Cab11 noma - Ex+Xrnal powor cllpply. Manufncturod by the cuntomor
Order number -
Module - MS140
1 n Extornol voltogo chocking line, 1

+24V - +24V
ov w2 I ov
I 1
I 1
I !!
3 core coblo
scroonad
3 x 0,752
3 wey
smell
Tuchel J Rofsronco roil
Plug of the .Sinumorik
ExtqrneL
power
SUPPlY
4 + 24v
Soldering oido
0
If: the external voltage io to bo checked

t)ridgo X - Y on the MS140(X142 1,2)
Under voltogo is sensed.
Values: Diablo co 2Ov

Direblo at 1611
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 26 E.4.84
Cnblc norno - Operators Pant31
Order numbor- 6FC9 540 33.
Module - MS100
Core
Colour
,.
1 [i yollow 1<
OAOO
I 1
black 112 <
*OADO *OADO
I I
groen
OADl OADl
black
*OADl *OADl
OAD2 OAD2
*OAD2 *OAD2
OAD3 OAD3
*DAD3 *OAD3
OAD4 OAD4
*OAD4 *OAD4
OAD5 DAD5
*OAD5 *OAD5
OAD6 DAD6
*OAD6 *OAD6
OAD7 OAD7
*DAD7 *OAD7
OCONL OCONL
*OCONL "OCONL
OSTRO OSTRD
*OSTRO *OSTRO
25 way 25 way EpoPa\eto*s

Submin. I..LL.-
Pan01
Socket
Cesin Screen x403
*
al Soldering
Socke
Side
e casing
Swtm 0 (N/2) 11 - 27 E.4.84
Cabla name - External position disploy
Ocdor number - GFC9 340 -35.
l Module - MS450, MS4t-JO
Coro
Colour
7 black i-1
1 II I
ID5 c ID5
brown !I 2
II c *ID5 I
*ID4
ID4
*ID6
ID6
*ID1
violet
ID1
ID3
r i I L *ID3
white/black i! ,Y *IDO
12 i I \ white/brown 1 I1
1 ID0
whito/rad
*ID2
whita oranqo ; i 14
1 * ID2
white/yellow !! 1%
I *ODIN
whitc/groon 1 1
1 - ODIN
I 1
I I
.
- M(JV)
-L brown/blue
brown.&iolot
2G core cable.
I / 1 Easing ocrpon
Sock& caoing
twisted anirn.
scrcanod, Casing Screen
Sock& casing
I ; I
50 woy
Submin.
Socket .*:
ml Sbldcring
Side
Soldoring Side
Ql
l **l
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 28 E.4.84
Cable name : PC (SS: AG 15OA/K or AG iSOW)

Order No;. : WC9 340-2N.
Module : MS 710
core
colour
r. t
I --
% black
*PlADB2 *PlAm2
\ brown
PlADB2 PlADB2
*PIAD . *PlADB3
PlADB3 \
PlADEi3
PlAmS PlADBS
\
l PlADBS l PlAoBs
w blue
l PlADB7 l PlADB7
\ violet
PlADB7 - PlADB7
5-y I
PlADBa I
\ white II c i mm8
*PlADE@
I c ~ *plADBa
PlADB9
lAm9
7
\
whitelblack
white/brown
! 1
1 !
I c
l PlAm9
Plx89
l
I white/red
1ADBlO I PlADBlO
\ white/orange ! t
PlADBlO l PlAml 0
mDBl1 PlAmll
PlADBl 1 PlAw311
,Pl Am1 2 *PI&ml 2
lADB12 PlAtsl2
PlAm313 l PlAml 3
mm1 3 PlAml3
lADBl4 PlAml4
PlADB14 *pIAm
?lAm15 PliuEl5
~PlmB15 *PVC81 5
bPlHIIE l p1mDE
?lHcoE PlKrn?
PlBUBU PlBuEuJ
kPIBUBU fPlBcBu
PlU?IlX PlaYIDs
l Plm *Plum6
green/red
*p1FuEN.D PlFCFAm
grtien/orange 1 I
PlKFXD PlFu?Am
I I
PlADBl PlAoel
*PlAoBl *PlADBl
*PlAm4 *plALX34
PlALx34 PlAu34
*PIAm
*PlAu36
PVC86
PlAcfs
yellow/red *p1m
l PlADBO yellow/orange,~ 1 Plubo
Pl?u.eO 1 1
Socket casings 42 core cable
8T : X71
twisted pairs
8M : X71r
screened PC: X726
8MC: X714
21x2x0.18
8N : X71r
1 free pair
mechanically
Latched
l
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 29 E.4.84
l
Cable name : PC (S5: AG 150A/K 01 AG 130W1
Orde; no. : WC9 340-ZP.
Module : MS 710
core
colour
Socket casings 42 core cable

g ; ;;;i twisted pairs PC: x725
mc: X71! screened
8N : X71! 21x2x0.18'
1 free pair
mechanically
latchad
System S (N/2) 11 - 30 E.4.84
Cab10 name - Serial data tronsfor (V24, 20 mA line currant)
Order numbor - 6FC9 340 -50.
Nodule - mS100
'o reader
X605
t
l RxD SEROUT
black i !
L I-
green I! 3, SERIN
*TxD \
\ black ! il
CTS
106
RTS
107
DTR
102 GND
MEXT
brown 108/2 READY
DSR L
,
(106)
1I ii )IN 66020
,13 ! ! Data output + 20 mA T grsen 1
TTY1
1:
L white
25 I I " " - 20 mA ,
TTY2 I
Data input + 20 mA -\ yollow I( i
TTY3 I
II II white I I
TTY4 - 20 mA
L 1
!I
' I iape.reader on + y grey I ;
$6 1 ,
PTRON I
1
MEXT 31 ! I Externol earth'for topo roador

L
white 1 !
I (Teletype) I
26 core coblo
I ! twisted pairs I!
scrsened
13 x 2 x o,102
4 free pairs
Casing screen Casing screen

Socket casing Sock& casing
-
y 25 way
25 way
Submin.
Submin.
Socket Socket
System 0 (N/2) 11 - 31 E.4.84
Cablo nnmo - serial data tronsfor
Order numbor - 6FC9 340 - 558
Modula - msioo
1)
Corb
mz
Facit 4030
&our (1
3 VOllOW I 1
*RxD 4 103 DATA OUT
II2
black 1
L
7 green ]! 3,
*TxD 104
black I i
L
I I
-l 9roy 105
CTS
black
L
brown
-\ 106 DATA REQUEST
RTS
black
L
orango
DTR 107
black
L
white
T 102
MEXT
brown
108/Z OPERABLE
L
1IN 66020
Doto output, + 20 mA ~ green

TTY1 13 !i
\ I I
25 1 i II 11 - 20 mA lhito ! L
TTY2 L
I I 1 I
I, i
TTY3
12 1 i 'Data input + 20 mA y&low
I" II - 20 mA
L
white
i;
TTY4 24
I!
1 !
I
I
Tapo rcadqr on + ,9-y I ,
16 1 !
PTRON
I 1 \ I :
Extbrnal earth for tape roadar whita i i
MEXT 21 !I
L I I
I (Tolatypo)
II 26 coca coblo
1i twiatod pnfrrs,
II screened
13 x 2 x.o,1a2
4 free pairs
II
CasiM Screen
!5- way 25 way
iubmin. Submin.
iockot Socket
System 8 (~/2) 11 - 32 E.4.84
Cable name : Serial Data Transfer

Order No. : 6FC9 340-5VB
: MS 100
Core 1)
*RxD
*TxD
CTS
RTS
DTR
MEXT
L brown I I 3
DSR I
1i il
TTY1
,3 I I Data output +2omA green
I1 1
I 1
s I 1 Data output -2od
TTY2 L
I I
Data input +2omA y yellow ! I
TTY3 I
TTY4
Data input -2om~
L white II
tape reader +
PTRON
external earth for
MEXT L
tape reader (Teletype)
26 core cable
twisted pairs
screened
13 x 2 x 0,18'
4 free pairs
Casing screen
Socket casing
Soldering
side
l
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 33 ~.4.84
Cable name : Serial data transfer (V.24, 20~ line current)

Order no. : 6FC9 340-4P.
Module : MS 100
Bezeichnun nach games according to Core

Ystem ,~ DIN 66020 4 FNI) I CCITT v.24 colour ? r 80
I ' I
ndedaten I Transmitted Data -? yellow1 1 i
Rx0- 1 1 Dl (103) TxD
I I
, II
1 Empfangsdaten 1 Received Data .I
l TxD-
' ' 02 (104) ' RxD
,I 1
b
I I I I
RTS-
oranqel I PT WI
J i Betriebsbereit- ; Data set ready _ 7
DTRd I V.24
Ml (107) schaft ' DSR
,
1 I black I[
L
I I I ! I
I Sfgnal Ground T white I iL
HEXT--r I
I \ I I
DE-Einrichtuna beJ Data terminal brown1 I ,2
DSRd lm
St (108) triebsb. 1 DTR ready
1 i 1i
I
TTYW
3 [I + 20 mA Stanzen/Drucken (Send Data) green !I 1:
I I
l-TYZ--(
5 1 1 - 20 mAtanzen/Drucken (Send Data) white If 2!
L I
TTY34
P I 1 t 20 mu Lesen (Received Oata) yellow1 1 11
PT 80
1 ,I - 20 ti:sen (Received Data) white II 2: TTY
TTYti I 1 L 1 1
Mext-
1 !I Signal Ground I1 2
able from PT SO
FC9 340-4KA
16 core cable
twisted pairs
screened
8x2x0.18
Casing screen
socket casing
soldering side
connector
Connector 25 pole
6FC9 341-1ED
female
female with casing
6FC9 341-1ER
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 34 E.4.84
Cable name : Serial data transfer

Order no. : 6FC9 340-6W.
Module : Ms 100
03040 PT88
X843 SAP-SI
2 !-I black 1 !-I 2

* Rx0 103
1 I ' I
I I - 1 I
' I brown \ I
I .
0 , L 1,
I I
3 f I red 7
1 I 3
*TX0 I ( I I 104
- I I
I I orange
I . LII
I
4 ! I p!llOW 7 ; I 20
CTS I , BUSY
- I
0 ! I green II ()
L
I
1I
1 ( blue -I
I i 1
HEX1 102
I I I
I I violet I j
I I L I!
I 1
I
I I cable I 1
8x2x0.18
I 1
screened I 1
4 free pairs I I
I
I
i
I
casing screen casing screen I /
I !
I I
I
I
25 pole -f 1 1101
submin. j,Tr'.?r
socket trt9 341
25.pelt.,
soldering side soldering side
PT88:
Interface adaption
Setting the alignment switches
Switch 51
I,:-&
switch 52
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 35 E.4.84
Cable name : Serial data transfer

Order no. 8 6FC9 340-41. PD/PF
Module : MS100 -place
SD
'ix0 RD
CTS RS
RTS 106 CS
3
,I-4
s
DR
CD
MEXT
SC
ER
soldering side
8T : x103, x11 cable connector

25 pole !5 pole
8M : x103, x11 male
submin. ;ocket
8MC: x103, X1( 6FC9 341-1ES
socket rith casir
8N : x103, x11 25 pole with >FC9 341-1
casing
J L
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 36 E.4.84
Cablename : serial data transfer portable

reader
Order no. : 6FC9 340-4V.
Module : MS 100
V?XO 103 SD
'TxO 106 RD
RTS 106 cs
.;:
s
i II 7 blue I I 20(
DTR 107 DR
violet II, .41
11
I
,,I I L
1 J ) -, white ! I, 7(
MEXT I 102 SG
20 1I grey )I 6(
DSR L 108/2 RDY
II 1!
16 core cable
twisted pairs
screened
0X2X0. IQ
cable connector
25 pole female
?5 pole with casing
hbmin . 6FC9 341-1ER
socket with bolt (nut)
J
System 8 (N/Z) 11 - 37 E.4.84
Cob10 name - Sorial dote tcansfor (V24 2LlmA line current)
Order numboc - GFC9 340 -5R.
fiodule - MSIM
1)
coca
Colour
ci
T yellow ! j
*RxD I
black
I I
L
green 1 !
*TxD
block Ii
L
! I
CTS Ii ? grey Ii
II block )I
, L I
RTS -\ brown ;I
t I1
black
b I I
orengo
DTR
black 1I
L II
MEXT 7
white , I
DSR \I
brown II
!I
1I
TTY1 3 !! pate output + 20 mA y 9roon I1 'I
I
5 II 1~ 11 -2OmA whito ,1;
TTY2
b. I
2 II
1 , Data input + 20 mA I yellow I[
TTY3
I
TTY4 14 1 I 4, t, L 20 mA white I II
I I
I '
Tape reader on + green
6 !I
PTRDN \ I1
MEXT !l Ii Extsrnol ground for tspe,reador
L
white
(T&typo)
II 20 cow cablo,
II twisted
scrooned
pairs
II 13 x.:.2 x o,ia2
1I 4 free pairs
1I
!I
Casing Screen
Sock& Casing
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 38 E.4.84
Comparison Chart - Colour Coding
A Core El Core
PAIR NUMBER Old New Old New
1 yellow black black brown

2 green red black orange
3 grey yellow black green
4 brown blue black violet
5 orange grey black white
6 yellow white/black white white/brown
7 green white/red white white/orange
0 grey white/yellow white white/green
9 brown white/blue white white/violet
IO orange white/grey white brown/black
11 yellow brown/red red brown/orange
12 green brown/yellow red brown/green
13 grey brown/blue red brown/violet
14 brown brown/grey red brown/white
15 orange green/black red green/brown
16 yellow green/red blue green/orange
17 green green/blue blue green/violet
18 grey green/grey blue green/white
19 brown yellow/black blue yellow/brown
20 orange yellow/red blue yellow/orange
21 yellow/blue yellow/violet
System 0 (N/2)
E.4.84
11 - 39
Connecting cablo for EXE 801 (X and Y Axes)
manufactured by customer
EXE 001
u
CDMA a! 87: Al
A Pulse
*CDMA Ki C6 6;
CDMB b
~2 A? El
B Pul55
G 68 p:
*CDMB
CDMZ
Markdr Signal
*CDMZ
*UAS 3;re A9 I34
Fault Signal
J
M(W) ~8 CB A3
M(W)
'h c9 c9
M(W)
12 coca cebla,
ocroono
t!
4 x 0,s
4 x 2 x 0,582
twiatod pairs
/ DO NOT CONNECT!
Casing Screen
5 way 25 way
iubmin. S&min.
iocket
Plug
System 8 (N/2) E.4.84
11 - 40
Connecting cable for EXE 802, EXE 804 (X and Y 3x05)
Nanufacturod by customer l-
EXE 802, 804
COMA A al
A Puloc
*CDMA 82 u,1
COMB I I c1 ,2
El Pulse
I I
*CDMB I A2 U,2
I II
r
CDMZ I B3 "a0
Markor Pulse I I
*CDMZ c2 i&j
I 1
*UAS 84 u,,
Fsult Signal
M(OV) 43 as
t5v
t5v
M b)
I '
15 i ! fl b)
I ! II
B
lie q
CBeing Scresn
M (ov)
[I
1 I
I
09 t+,
M(OV)
M(OV)
+5v
t5v
CDMA II7 "al

A Pulse
CDMA C6 u,1
;I
CDMB
*CDMB
B Pulse I!
A7
B8
"a2
-
"a2
l
II
CDMZ c7 "a0
*CDMZ
marker Pulse I ! A8 5
I!
*UAS A9 5
Fault Signal
M(OVl c8 "as
2 x 12 core csbles,
2 x 15 WB ?5 way
Sutxnin. Submin
Socket Plug
/ 00 NOT CONNECT!
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 41 E.4.84
Connecting cable for EXE 802 (2 Axis)
l Manufactured by customer
EXE 802
2 Axis
. I
1 !I
CDMA u al c3
A Pulss
*CDMA G A4
II
CDMB a2 B5
*CDMB Gz c4
CDMZ Ja0 A5
Marker Pulse
*CDnZ G B6
*UAS r,, A6
Fault Signal
I a5
M(OV) / c5
8 ] j m b)
M(W) JN c9
P (WI
$5
M(OV)
I -
Il
I!
+5v
t5v
12 core cablc,
8croane !l
4 x 0,5
4 x 2 x 0,32
twisted pairs
/ DO NOT CONNECT!
15 wpy 25 way
Submin. Soldering Side Submin.
Sodkot Plug
System 8 (N/2) 11 - 42 E.4.84
Connecting cable for - EXE 805, EXE 805, EXE 815 (X, Y and 2 axes)
Manufactured by customer
EXE 005,
805,
613.
CDMA Al U
*CDMA 82 II+
COMB c Ua2
l CDMB A2 Ua2
CDMZ B3 Uao
*CDMZ c2 UaO
*UAS 84 u,,
M(O-) A3 Uas
M(OV) c9 UN
M(OV)
+5v
+5v
casing acroonn !11 I
CDMA c3 Ual
*CDMA A4 %-l
CDMB B5 ua2
*CDMB c4 u,2
CDMZ A5 Uao
*CDMZ B6 UaO
*UAS A6 u,,
C5 Uas
M(OV)
M(OV)
M(OV)
+5v
+5v
CDMA
*CDMA
CDMB
*CDMB
CDMZ
*CDMZ
*UAS
M(OV)
M(OV)
M(JV)
+5v
+5v
3 x 12 core cables,,
ii
L
screont3
4 x 0,5 -$
4 x 2 x 0,302
( i casing scresn twisted pairs
5 x-15 we 25. why
Submfn Sol&ring S,Ld Submin
socket Rlug
/ DO NOT CONNECT!
I
System 8 (N/2)
11 - 43 E.4.84
I
Connecting csblo for - EXE 007 (X and A Axes)
flanufactured by customer
Axfo 1
Y X
CDMA Ual B7 Al
"CDMA &ii C6 B2
CDMB A7
"a2 Cl
*CDME3 u,2 Bt3 A2
I-
CDMZ
Marker Pulse
I1 c7 83
I 1
*CDMZ J I - A8 c2
*UAS u,, A9 I34

Il
Fault Signal I ]
M(OV) CEI A3
;/ uas
II
fl (ov)
M(W) c9 c9
M(W)
+5v
+5v
12 core cablo
screone
9
4 x 0,5
4 x 2 x 0,382
twiatod pairs
:/ 00 NOT CONNECT1
15' way
23 way
Submin. , Soldering Sid
Submin.
Socket
Plug
System El (N/2) 12 - '1 E.4.84
12. External equipment and dimension drawinqs

Interface Signals for SINUMERIK 8 System

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Interface Signals for SINUMERIK 8 System

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

System 8 (N/2) I E.4.

0 Interface signals for SINUMERIK 8

00 Interface signals for extended VDI interface,

1.1.1.2 Cables and plugs

1.1.1.3 Mains requirements

1.1.1.4 Mains connections

1.1.1.5 Switch on sequence

1.1.1.7 Measures to Reduce Interference

1.1.1.8 Mechanical and climatic conditions

1.1.2.1 Standard cubicle 1500 mm

1.1.2.2 Compact cubicle

System 8 (N/2) II E.4.84

2. Description of extended VDI interface

2.1.1 Reset signals

2.2 Description of inteqral PC (interface control)

2.3 Definition of input and output siqnals

2.3.1 Output signals NC --e PC

2.3.2 Input signals PC 4 NC

2.4 Output siqnals NC +PC

2.4.1.1 *NC READY 1

2.5 Output signals NC I PC

2.6 Output siqnals NC ----L PC

2.6.6 X BLOCK CHANGE DELAY

2.6.7 Tool number T

2.6.8 Auxiliary Function H

2.6.9 Preparatory functions G

2.6.10 ACTIVE PROGRAMNUMBER

Putput Signals for Control of the Spindle (NC -- PC)

2.6.12 Block Diagram of I/O-Signals, Spindle Control

2.6.13 ACTUAL SPINDLE ROTATIONCLOCKWISE

2.6.14 SPINDLE SPEED LIMIT

2.7 Input Signals PC -- NC

2.8 input Signals PC -- NC

2.9 Input Signals PC -- NC

2.9.1 *DATA INPUT ENABLE

2.10 Input Signals to Spindle Controller PC -- NC

2.10.1 *SECOND RAMP VALUE FOR SPINDLE/*KV SWITCHOVER

2.11 Data Transfer PC -- NC

2.11.1 2 Bytes for External Data Input

2.11.4 ?R PARAMETERREAD/STORE (Block Transfer via Handshake)

2.12 Inhibit Sianals PC -- NC

2.12.1 AXIS INHIBIT

2.13 Data Transfer DNC.-(02)

2.13.1 INFORMATION STORED IN I-BUFFER

2.14 Extended Interface NC/PC (02)

2.15 Extended Interface NC/PC

3 Description of "Mains ON Module" Signals

4. Description of the Signals NC - Machine

5. Description of the signals Machine - NC

5.1 Feed drives

6.1 Block Diagram

7. Operator's Panel Extension

7.1 Technical Data

8. External Position Displays

8.1 Technical Data

9. Peripherals and Accessories SIMATIC S5

9.1 Basic Control 2

10. System 8 Diagrams

11. Cable Diagrams

12. External Devices and Dimension Drawings

This manual describes the individual interface signals between

This manual contains:

We reserve the right to change this manual when required by

2.10.1 SECOND RAMP VALUE FOR SPINDLE/KV SWITCHOVER

Follow- Axis in- necelera. ITFeed Con - Limit I-imit